manualshive.com logo in svg

Panasonic KX-TDE100, Programming Manual

The Panasonic KX-TDE100 is a versatile communication system that offers advanced features and flexibility for businesses. To make the most out of this product, it's essential to have the User Manual. Download the free manual from our website and explore the full potential of your Panasonic KX-TDE100.

Share
Download
background image

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1  Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data

Transmission ISDN->VoIP

Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from an ISDN port through any VoIP ports that are set to transmit
BLF data.

Value Range

Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

11.2  [9-2] Network Data Transmission

Programming Manual References

11.3  [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)—

IP-GW Card Slot No. to notify BLF data to Network Operator

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1  Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data

Transmission Counter

Specifies the maximum number of "hops", or transmissions between two PBXs, before a packet of BLF data
is discarded.

Value Range

1–63

Maintenance Console Location

11.2  [9-2] Network Data Transmission

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1  Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data

Broadcasting Interval Timer

Specifies the frequency of BLF data transmission. The PBX will send data over the network periodically
according to the interval specified here.

PC Programming Manual

895

11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission

Summary of Contents for KX-TDE100

Page 1: ...nic Pure IP PBX Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use KX TDE100 KX TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 3 0000 or later KX TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 3 0000 or later Model No KX TDE100 KX TDE200 KX TDE600 ...

Page 2: ...Related sections of the PC Programming Manual are listed for your reference Feature Guide References The Feature Guide explains what the PBX can do as well as how to obtain the most of its many features and facilities Sections from the Feature Guide are listed throughout this manual for your reference Installation Manual References The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the instal...

Page 3: ...ile data is being written to the card 3 The PC will not perform any shutdown operation or enter the power saving system standby mode while the Maintenance Console is connected to the PBX To perform either of the operations above first close the connection to the PBX Trademarks Microsoft Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United ...

Page 4: ...8S The KX TDE600UK KX TDE600NE and KX TDE600GR are designed to interwork with the Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN of European countries Pan European Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN using ISDN basic rate access Pan European Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN using ISDN primary rate access ONP 2048 kbit s digital structured leased lines D2048S Panasonic Communications ...

Page 5: ...launcher Connect Profile Setup 44 2 3 File 45 2 3 1 File Close 45 2 3 2 File Save 46 2 3 3 File Save As 47 2 3 4 File Exit 48 2 4 Disconnect 49 2 4 1 Disconnect Disconnect 49 2 5 Tool 50 2 5 1 Tool SD memory backup 50 2 5 2 Tool BRI Automatic Configuration 51 2 5 3 Tool NDSS Link Data Clear 52 2 5 4 Tool DXDP All OUS 53 2 5 5 Tool Simplified Voice Message Delete All Recording 54 2 5 6 Tool Simplif...

Page 6: ...erty Virtual IP Gateway DN2IP 177 3 13 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Hunt Pattern 179 3 14 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IP Extension 180 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension 187 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Connection Command 196 3 17 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual SIP Extension 197 3 18 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual SIP Extension Port 201 3 19 1 1 S...

Page 7: ...1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property 440 3 59 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Card Command 446 3 60 1 1 Slot OPB3 Option Card Setup 448 3 61 1 2 Portable Station 450 3 62 1 3 Option 454 3 63 1 4 Clock Priority 456 4 2 System 457 4 1 2 1 1 Date Time Date Time Setting 458 4 2 2 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving 459 4 3 2 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Daylight Saving 461 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM 463 4 5 2 3 Tim...

Page 8: ...p Member List 661 5 29 3 11 Air Synchronisation Group 662 6 4 Extension 663 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 664 6 2 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings CLIP Generate 717 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND 720 6 4 4 1 3 Wired Extension Speed Dial 722 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button 723 6 6 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Flexible button data copy 741 6 7 4 1 5 Wired...

Page 9: ...4 11 3 9 3 Network Operator VoIP 898 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table 899 12 10 CO Incoming Call 901 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings 902 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings 905 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table 916 12 4 10 3 DDI DID Table Automatic Registration 919 12 5 10 3 DDI DID Table Name Generate 921 12 6 10 4 MSN Table 923 12 7 10 5 Miscellaneous 928 13 11 Maintenance 931 13 1 11 1 Main 932 13 2 11 2 PT Programming ...

Page 10: ...Feature Programming References 977 10 PC Programming Manual Table of Contents ...

Page 11: ...Section 1 Overview This section provides an overview of programming the PBX PC Programming Manual 11 ...

Page 12: ...o enter programming mode will be denied access Ways to Programme There are two programming methods PC Personal Computer Programming All features and settings of the PBX can be programmed through PC programming with Maintenance Console Installing and starting the Maintenance Console is described in Section 1 2 PC Programming Individual PC programming items are described in Section 2 Introduction of...

Page 13: ... on a white background below can be used when storing a name message password or other text entry data using a PC The available characters vary according to the model of PBX Table 1 Standard PC Programming Manual 13 1 1 2 Entering Characters ...

Page 14: ...Table 2 For CE model 14 PC Programming Manual 1 1 2 Entering Characters ...

Page 15: ...Table 3 For RU model PC Programming Manual 15 1 1 2 Entering Characters ...

Page 16: ...Table 4 For GR model 16 PC Programming Manual 1 1 2 Entering Characters ...

Page 17: ...s how to install and start the Maintenance Console System Requirements Required Operating System Microsoft Windows XP or Windows Vista Business operating system Minimum Hardware Requirements HDD 100 MB of available hard disk space Recommended Display Settings Screen resolution XGA 1024 768 DPI setting Normal size 96 DPI PC Programming Manual 17 1 2 1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console...

Page 18: ...details about the basic items refer to 2 3 4 Quick Setup in the Feature Guide 1 Connect the PC to the PBX with an Ethernet straight cable or RS 232C cross cable 2 Start the Maintenance Console from the Start menu 3 Information before programming appears a Carefully read this important additional information which includes updates to this and other manuals b Click OK to close this window 4 a Enter ...

Page 19: ...ype the IP address of the IPCEMPR card in the IP Address for IPCEMPR Card box 1 c In the IP Address for VoIP DSP box type the IP address of the DSP16 or DSP64 card 2 d In the Subnet Mask box type the subnet mask address of the network 3 e In the Default Gateway box type the IP address of the default gateway 4 f Click Apply After Quick Setup is completed if the IP addressing information was not cha...

Page 20: ...ange 0 0 0 0 to 223 255 255 255 PBX Web Manager It is possible to use a PC with the Maintenance Console PBX Unified PC Maintenance Console installed as a web server This allows users to configure the PBX via a web browser on a local client or a remote PC through the Internet PBX Server Client Remote PC IP Network If Maintenance Console is installed on the client PC a web server is not necessary PB...

Page 21: ...ddress port and password Any profiles using LAN connection that have been saved when accessing the Maintenance Console directly will be automatically displayed for easy access to your PBX 3 Click Connect PBX Web Manager Main Menu After successful login the main menu will appear where settings can be changed Note While logged in if there is no activity over a 5 minute period PBX Web Manager will au...

Page 22: ...mmer code to access installer level PC programming All system programming settings are available The three programmer codes used for PC programming can be set through Maintenance Console For more information about programmer codes see 2 1 2 Access Levels CAUTION To the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password 1 Please provide all system passwords to the customer 2 To avoid unauthor...

Page 23: ...Section 2 Introduction of Maintenance Console This section serves as reference operating instructions when using the Maintenance Console software to programme the PBX PC Programming Manual 23 ...

Page 24: ...stem data file To start Maintenance Console in Interactive mode 1 Enter the relevant programmer code 2 Click OK The programme launcher will appear 3 Click Connect Connection options will be displayed Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre saved profile This option is only available when one or more profiles have been previously stored a Select the profile to use from the drop down list b I...

Page 25: ... Comment Max 40 characters Enter a comment to identify the set of values Port COMx Specify the number of the COM port assigned to the PC s modem interface Only available COM ports will be displayed Baud Rate bps 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Specify the speed of data transmission Modem Initialise Enter the modem initialise command and click Initialise to send the command to the modem For more de...

Page 26: ...that was input in Maintenance Port Number of 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Connection Setting for ISDN Remote Setting Values Explanation Dial Number 30 digits consisting of 1 9 0 and comma Enter the telephone number to be dialled to access the PBX 26 PC Programming Manual 2 1 1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes ...

Page 27: ... initial description of that menu option for example This option is only available at Installer level If a sentence like this does not appear under the heading the menu option is available at all levels The target users for each access level are as follows Access Level User User For end users Administrator For system administrators Installer For dealers and system installers The options available ...

Page 28: ...Simplified Voice Message Delete All Recording ü Simplified Voice Message Check Current Usage ü Call Pickup for My Group ü ü Extension List View ü ü ü ü ü ü Import Feature Speed Dial and Caller ID ü ü ü ü ü ü Import Incoming Call DDI DID Table ü ü Import ARS Leading Digit ü ü Import ARS Except Code ü ü Import ARS Routing Plan ü ü Import Wired Extension ü ü Import PS Extension ü ü Import Quick Dial ...

Page 29: ...ion ü ü Export SIP Extension ü ü Export V IPGW16 GW Settings ü ü Export V IPGW16 DN2IP ü ü Screen Customize User Level ü ü Screen Customize Administrator Level ü ü Utility Menu Option Batch Interactive U A I U A I Diagnosis ü ü ü File Transfer PC to PBX SD Card ü File Transfer PBX SD Card to PC ü SD Card File View and Load ü SD Card File Delete ü Message File Transfer PC to PBX ü Message File Tran...

Page 30: ...ü Card Software Timed Update ü System Reset Reset by the Command ü View Menu Option Batch Interactive U A I U A I Toolbar ü ü ü ü ü ü Statusbar ü ü ü ü ü ü System Menu ü ü ü ü ü ü Window Menu Option Batch Interactive U A I U A I Cascade ü ü ü ü ü ü Tile Horz ü ü ü ü ü ü Tile Vert ü ü ü ü ü ü Help Menu Option Batch Interactive U A I U A I Help ü ü ü ü ü ü Additional Information ü ü ü ü ü ü About ü ...

Page 31: ...ded into several areas as shown below 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 Menu Bar Provides access to file management and connection options as well as tools and utilities used in programming the PBX For details see Sections 2 3 File to 2 7 Help 2 Tool Bar Provides easy access to commonly used software functions Two tool bars are provided as follows PC Programming Manual 31 2 1 3 Software Interface ...

Page 32: ...Clicking an expanded sub topic will hide the names of individual screens Double click on a screen name to open that screen in 6 Main Screen below This menu can be positioned freely Click and drag the title bar of the menu to move it to another position It will automatically snap in to either the left side or right side of the main window if released there Otherwise it will float separately from th...

Page 33: ...everal standard buttons that are displayed on many screens within the Maintenance Console The standard buttons are as follows Button Function OK Implements changes and closes the current screen Cancel Abandons changes and returns to the previous screen Close Keeps any changes implemented and closes the current screen Apply Implements changes and remains on the same screen Refresh Implements change...

Page 34: ...ns that the card is installed correctly in the PBX and is capable of being used normally Out of service means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX but has been temporarily removed from use This allows settings to be modified or software to be upgraded Fault means that the card is not installed in the PBX correctly or is not functioning correctly For more information see the Installation...

Page 35: ...the bottom of the Maintenance Console window System Menu Displays or hides the menu of PBX setting screens Window Cascade When multiple data screens are open displays all open screens overlapped with the title bars visible Tile Horz When multiple data screens are open displays all open screens side by side Tile Vert When multiple data screens are open displays all open screens vertically PC Progra...

Page 36: ...nge Wired Extension Portable Station VM Group DPT VM Group DTMF ICD Group PS Ring Group OGM DISA External Pager Analogue MODEM ISDN Remote Extension Numbers Names List Displays all available extensions of the types selected in Extension Type and names Click entries to select them and click the Add button when finished to add the selected extensions To deselect an entry click it again Value Range M...

Page 37: ...e created here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX see 2 6 2 Utility File Transfer PC to PBX SD Card Note Since selecting this option creates a blank system data file uploading this file to the PBX will overwrite all previous settings Use only when necessary To create a new system data file 1 From the programme launcher select New 2 Click the appropriate model number 3 Click OK PC Programmi...

Page 38: ...s that were created by the Maintenance Console for a supported PBX To upload a file opened here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX see 2 6 2 Utility File Transfer PC to PBX SD Card To open a system data file 1 From the programme launcher select Open The Open dialogue box will be displayed 2 Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open 3 Select the file 4 Click Op...

Page 39: ...ofile This option is only available when one or more profiles have been previously stored a Select the profile to use from the drop down list b If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile enter it If the system password has been stored with the selected profile it does not need to be entered To enter the parameters manually select the PBX Model and confirm that the RS 2...

Page 40: ... a Profile Name if you want to use a pre saved profile a Select the profile to use from the drop down list b If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile enter it If the system password has been stored with the selected profile it does not need to be entered To enter the parameters manually select the PBX Model and confirm that the USB radio button is selected a Enter th...

Page 41: ...he system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile enter it If the system password has been stored with the selected profile it does not need to be entered To enter the parameters manually select the PBX Model and confirm that the LAN radio button is selected a Specify the settings as required For more details see the table below b Enter the system password for the PBX 3 Click Con...

Page 42: ...password has been stored with the selected profile it does not need to be entered To enter the parameters manually select the PBX Model and confirm that the Modem radio button is selected a Specify the settings as required For more details see the table below b Enter the system password for the PBX 3 Click Connect Connection Settings for Modem Setting Values Description Dial Number 1 9 0 comma T P...

Page 43: ...ISDN Remote 1 From the programme launcher select Connect The Login window will be displayed 2 Select a connection option Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre saved profile a Select the profile to use from the drop down list b If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile enter it If the system password has been stored with the selected profile it does not need t...

Page 44: ...ckup of all profiles This allows you to use the original connection settings with the new Maintenance Console The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows Button Function Profile File Opens or saves profiles as separate files Save current profile Overwrites the previous settings with the current settings when a profile already exists A confirmation message will be displayed Save as n...

Page 45: ... the programme launcher To close a system data file From the File menu select Close If the system data file has not been saved a warning message will be displayed giving you the option to save the file Click Yes to save the file Click No to abandon the changes PC Programming Manual 45 2 3 1 File Close ...

Page 46: ...upload a file saved here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX see 2 6 2 Utility File Transfer PC to PBX SD Card To save a system data file From the File menu select Save If the data has never been saved the Save dialogue box will be displayed For more details see 2 3 3 File Save As 46 PC Programming Manual 2 3 2 File Save ...

Page 47: ...sfer PC to PBX SD Card To save a system data file with a new name 1 From the File menu select Save As 2 Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file 3 Enter a file name or select a file to overwrite 4 Click Save If choosing to overwrite another file a warning message will be displayed Click Yes to overwrite Click No to return to the previous screen PC Programming Manual 47 2 3 3 File ...

Page 48: ... Console From the File menu select Exit If the system data file being modified has not been saved a warning message will be displayed giving you the option to save the file Click Yes to save the file Click No to abandon the changes 48 PC Programming Manual 2 3 4 File Exit ...

Page 49: ...he PBX When this option is chosen system data is automatically backed up from the PBX to the SD memory card see 2 5 1 Tool SD memory backup To disconnect 1 From the Disconnect menu select Disconnect A confirmation message will be displayed 2 Click Yes PC Programming Manual 49 2 4 1 Disconnect Disconnect ...

Page 50: ...ry backup Saves system data from the PBX to the SD memory card Backup begins as soon as this option is chosen To back up system data From the Tool menu select SD memory backup 50 PC Programming Manual 2 5 1 Tool SD memory backup ...

Page 51: ...tus At any time on this screen you can click Close to return to the previous screen without saving To configure the BRI card 1 From the Tool menu select BRI Automatic Configuration 2 Select the BRI card to configure by clicking the Check cell and setting it to ON 3 Click OK The ports associated with the selected BRI card will be displayed on a new screen 4 Enter suitable Subscriber Numbers for the...

Page 52: ...rs it at the connected PBX To clear this data at other PBXs in the network it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs To clear the NDSS Link Data From the Tool menu select NDSS Link Data Clear A confirmation screen will be displayed Click OK to clear the data Click Cancel to keep the data and close the screen 52 PC Programming Manual 2 5 3 Tool NDSS Link Data Clear ...

Page 53: ...DP All OUS Sets the status of all DXDP XDP extension ports to OUS simultaneously To set all DXDP XDP ports to OUS 1 From the Tool menu select DXDP All OUS 2 Click OK PC Programming Manual 53 2 5 4 Tool DXDP All OUS ...

Page 54: ...es recorded by the SVM feature To delete voice messages 1 From the Tool menu point to Simplified Voice Message and select Delete All Recording 2 Select the card from which to delete messages 3 Click OK 54 PC Programming Manual 2 5 5 Tool Simplified Voice Message Delete All Recording ...

Page 55: ...s stored by the SVM feature For each message the type of message and the associated extension are displayed To view SVM message status From the Tool menu point to Simplified Voice Message and select Check Current Usage PC Programming Manual 55 2 5 6 Tool Simplified Voice Message Check Current Usage ...

Page 56: ... Group The Group Call Pickup feature number default 40 the extension user group number of the extension is assigned to first personal speed dial Note This tool can only be activated if all of the following conditions are met The first Quick Dial setting is empty or is already set to 0 0 is not used for another feature number The Group Call Pickup feature number has been assigned The Personal Speed...

Page 57: ...Type Detail Intercom Wired Extension VM Voice Mail Portable Station Wireless Extension Portable Station ICDG Incoming Call Distribution Group WG PS Ring Group VM DPT VM DPT Group VM DTMF VM DTMF Group Pager External Pager MODEM Analogue Modem ISDN Remote ISDN Modem OGM DISA DISA DSS DSS Console DPT I F CS PT interface CS SVM SVM Feature SIP IP PT IP Telephone To view extension information From the...

Page 58: ...ial and Caller ID Data Type Import Destination System Speed Dialling Number Location Name Name CO Line Access Number Telephone Number Dial CLI Destination CLI Destination Related programming 8 1 6 1 System Speed Dial Incoming Call DDI DID Table Data Type Import Destination Location Location DDI DID Number Dial In Number DDI DID Name Dial In Name DDI DID Destination Day Destination Day DDI DID Dest...

Page 59: ...elect Related programming 10 3 8 3 Routing Plan Time Wired Extension Data Type Import Destination No selected automatically Extension Number Extension Number selected automatically Extension Name Extension Name selected automatically Related programming 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings PS Extension Data Type Import Destination No Location selected automatically Extension Number 1 Exten...

Page 60: ...Extension Number Password Password Related programming 3 18 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual SIP Extension Port V IPGW16 GW Settings Data Type Import Destination No Location GW Name GW Name GW IP Address GW IP Address GW Group GW Group No Connection for IP GW16 Connection for IP GW16 Protocol Protocol Progress Tone Send Mode Progress Tone Send Mode IP Codec Priority 1st IP Codec Priority 1st IP Code...

Page 61: ...mported file will be displayed 5 For the Feature Speed Dial and Caller ID table select the Speed Dial table to which to import the data system or tenant from the drop down list 6 If required select import fields When import fields can be selected the selection screen is displayed automatically Matching origin and destination fields are entered by default To change the destination for an import fie...

Page 62: ...Panel To export system data 1 From the Tool menu point to Export and then click the type of data to export 2 Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file 3 Enter a file name 4 Click Save When export fields are automatically selected the file will be saved When export fields can be selected the selection screen will be displayed automatically 5 For the Feature Speed Dial and Caller ID ...

Page 63: ...ce Console and in the menu bar to users with the level of access being edited To modify displayed screens 1 From the Tool menu point to Screen Customize and then click the access level to modify 2 Select the items that you want to have displayed Clear the check box beside the names of items you do not want to have displayed Select the check box beside the names of items you want to have displayed ...

Page 64: ...SLC16 ECSLC24 CSIF LCOT ELCOT T1 E1 BRI PRI OPB E M DID IP EXT Card CT Bus diagnosis KX TDE100 KX TDE200 only DHLC DLC SLC8 SLC16 MSLC16 CSLC16 CSIF LCOT T1 E1 BRI PRI OPB E M DID IP EXT DTMF Receive test port DHLC SLC8 SLC16 MSLC16 ESLC16 EMSLC16 CSLC16 ECSLC24 E M DID PT loop back diagnosis DHLC DLC DSP DTMF generator receiver diagnosis T1 E1 DSP DTMF receiver diagnosis T1 E1 Framer IC alarm sig...

Page 65: ...from extension to trunk turns off Line current ON Ext CO Line current from extension to trunk turns on Off hook detection CO Ext Off hook generation detection from trunk to extension DTMF detection CO Ext DTMF generation detection from trunk to extension DP detection CO Ext DP generation detection from trunk to extension BELL detection Ext CO BELL generation detection from extension to trunk Speec...

Page 66: ...rk loopback test 1 From the Utility menu select Diagnosis 2 Click on the Status cell of the PRI23 card and set it to OUS 3 Click on the cell showing the card type A new window will be displayed 4 Select the Loopback Type option A new window will be displayed 5 Select Point1 or Point2 depending on the type of loopback test you want to perform The available selections may vary depending on the hardw...

Page 67: ...e Command for PMMPR PGMPR DMSYS DGSYS and LIC files Use the Activation Key button see 3 3 1 1 Slot Activation Key for other LIC files and the SD Card File View and Load utility see 2 6 4 Utility SD Card File View and Load for all other files The PBX examines the header information of a file to determine 2 things whether the file contains supported data and which system component the file applies t...

Page 68: ...y PBUSS BUS S KX TDE600 only CS Programme Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Unit PCSDECT CS using a CSIF card for DECT Portable Station PDCSDECT CS using a DHLC DLC card for DECT Portable Station PHCSDECT High density CS for DECT Portable Station PCS24G CS using a CSIF card for 2 4 GHz Portable Station PDCS24G CS using a DHLC DLC card for 2 4 GHz Portable Station System Data KX TDE100 KX TDE200...

Page 69: ... Data Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Unit DLNG0 DLNG5 PT DVMLNG1 DVMLNG5 VPS Display Guidance data Activation Key Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card LIC00 LIC99 V IPEXT32 V SIPEXT32 V IPGW16 V SIPGW16 Default Value Data KX TDE100 KX TDE200 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DMINI IPCMPR DMIDHLC DHLC8 DMISLC SLC8 CSLC16 DMIDLC DLC8 DLC16 DMIBRI BRI DMICSINF CSIF DMILCOT LCOT8 LC...

Page 70: ... DMIVSPEX V SIPEXT32 KX TDE600 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DGINI IPCEMPR DGIDHLC DHLC8 DGISLC SLC8 EMSLC16 ESLC16 CSLC16 ECSLC24 DGIDLC DLC8 DLC16 DGIBRI BRI DGICSINF CSIF DGILCOT ELCOT16 DGIT1 T1 DGIE1 E1 DGIEM E M DGIOPB3 OPB3 DGIEIO EIO DGIIPGW2 IP GW4 DGIIPGW3 IP GW16 DGIPRI23 PRI23 DGIPRI30 PRI30 DGIDID DID8 DGIIPEXT IP EXT16 70 PC Programming Manual 2 6 2 Utility File Transfer ...

Page 71: ...nsfer PC to PBX SD Card The dialogue box will be displayed 2 Select the file to upload A window showing the upload progress will be displayed While transferring files to the SD memory card the PBX automatically renames them according to the header information A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete 3 Click OK PC Programming Manual 71 2 6 2 Utility File Transfer PC to PBX SD Card ...

Page 72: ...r dealer to identify the source of a problem If there is only one error data file its name will be SYSERR If there is more than one file the files will be numbered in chronological order up to a maximum of 9 files To transfer files to the PC 1 From the Utility menu select File Transfer PBX SD Card to PC 2 Select the file to download from the list of files on the SD memory card Only the files liste...

Page 73: ...Card File View and Load 2 Click on the name of the desired file Only files containing programme data whose filenames start with P can be selected 3 Click Detail The Detail screen will be displayed Header information from the chosen SD memory card file is displayed on the left 4 From the Card drop down list on the right select the card s whose software you want to update To update a specific card o...

Page 74: ...eleted by this utility KX TDE100 KX TDE200 PMMPR DMSYS KX TDE600 PGMPR DGSYS To delete files from the SD memory card 1 From the Utility menu select SD Card File Delete 2 Click on the file to be deleted 3 Click Delete A confirmation screen will be displayed 4 Click OK The display will return to the SD Card File Delete screen 74 PC Programming Manual 2 6 5 Utility SD Card File Delete ...

Page 75: ...ecified by the file s header information Uploaded files are automatically renamed as necessary If this location already contains an OGM it will be overwritten by the newly uploaded message To transfer OGMs to an MSG ESVM card block 1 From the Utility menu select Message File Transfer PC to PBX 2 Select the target MSG ESVM card block or ALL from the drop down list and click OK The Open dialogue box...

Page 76: ...menu select Message File Transfer PBX to PC 2 From the upper drop down list select the target MSG ESVM card block 3 From the lower drop down list select the messages to transfer To transfer a certain message select the number of that message To transfer all messages at once select ALL The Save dialogue box will be displayed 4 Enter a file name 5 Click Save 6 Click OK When you choose to transfer al...

Page 77: ...text file Minor Displays minor errors which affect only a certain part of system operation Major Displays major errors which affect operation of the whole system or result in system failure Clear Erases the stored error log information from both the screen and the PBX Log Information Displays probable causes of the errors and their solutions The items displayed on screen are as follows Item Descri...

Page 78: ... 12 01 to 11 Free Slots 12 BUS S Card Slot KX TDE100 KX TDE200 KX TDE600 Virtual slot 00 to 08 00 Built in ESVM card 01 to 04 Virtual Trunk Slots 05 to 08 Virtual Extension Slots ZZ Port number For optional service cards except OPB3 card Port number 01 to 16 will be displayed For OPB3 card Sub slot number 1 to 3 port number 1 to 4 will be displayed as follows Sub slot 1 of OPB3 11 to 14 Sub slot 2...

Page 79: ...e versa will be highlighted in red until the next screen refresh is performed To view signalling bit information 1 From the Utility menu select T1 E1 Signalling Bit Monitor 2 From the Slot No drop down list select the target slot 3 From the Interval Timer drop down list select the number of seconds between each automatic screen refresh 4 Click Start Monitoring will be performed and the screen will...

Page 80: ...ility menu select T1 E1 Line Trace 2 From the Slot No drop down list select the target slot 3 From the CH No drop down list select the target channel 4 Click Start Trace information will be displayed The information is automatically updated whenever the data being monitored changes 5 Click Stop to end the trace 6 Select an option Click Capture to save the displayed trace information Information is...

Page 81: ...tton is clicked Accumulation Trace Previously accumulated data is retrieved and displayed Error Accumulation Trace Previously accumulated error data is retrieved and displayed This trace shows the data snapshot that is taken just before a card resets To view trace data 1 From the Utility menu select ISDN QSIG Protocol Trace 2 From the Slot No drop down list select the target slot 3 From the Trace ...

Page 82: ...W16 Protocol Trace When the progress bar disappears the protocol trace is complete The trace data has been saved to the SD Memory Card file name PRTH323 To transfer trace data to the PC 1 From the Utility menu select File Transfer PBX SD Card to PC The trace data will be displayed 2 Select the desired trace data file 3 Click Transfer 4 Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file 5 En...

Page 83: ...ss of Signal RAI 301 Digital trunk RAI signal reception AIS 302 Digital trunk Alarm Indication Signal reception Frame Failure 300 Digital trunk frame failure Loss of Frame Counter of minor communication error CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check error SF Severely errored frame or Severe Framing Error FE Frame synchronisation bit error LV Line Code Violation SL Controlled slip To view digital trunk informat...

Page 84: ...rrive RTP Arrive Packet Interval MIN ms Minimum time taken for a packet to arrive To view IP extension information 1 From the Utility menu select IP Extension Statistical Information 2 From the Card Selection drop down list select the slot number for the card IPCMPR VoIP DSP can be selected for the DSP card when DSP Card Status is enabled See 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR 3 Click Execute The s...

Page 85: ...e display shows OFF 2 4 GHz PSs can use up to 3 paths DECT PSs can use up to 4 paths When using high density CSs or IP CSs DECT PSs can use up to 8 paths Group Call Number of PSs registered to the attached CS that are members of a PS Ring Group To view CS information 1 From the Utility menu select CS Information 2 From the Target CSI F Slot No drop down list select the target slot To display infor...

Page 86: ...ollows Item Description PS No PS location number Only registered PSs will be displayed Extension Number Extension number of the PS Location Slot Slot number of the CS that the PS is registered with Location Port Port number of the CS that the PS is registered with To view PS information 1 From the Utility menu select PS Information 2 Click Refresh 86 PC Programming Manual 2 6 16 Utility PS Informa...

Page 87: ...2 digit ID number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with Monitored Value Monitored value dBm of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with Monitored Level Monitored level signal strength level of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with To monitor the status of CSs 1 From the Utility menu select CS Status Monitor 2 From the Air Sync Group No drop down list select a...

Page 88: ...available when the Maintenance Console is in Interactive mode To perform a Ping test 1 Enter a specific IP address in the IP Address box 2 Click Test to perform the test The result will be displayed 3 Select an option Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information 1 Enter a file name or select a file to overwrite 2 Click Save Click Close to return to the Ping screen 88 PC Programming ...

Page 89: ...ility menu select File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment and then either IP CS or NT400 2 Input the FTP Server Address and File Name 3 Put a check in the Select check boxes of the items to be updated 4 Click Timed Update The Timed Update screen appears For information on setting this screen see 2 6 20 Utility Card Software Timed Update Note Cards are automatically set to OUS status during an update and...

Page 90: ...he list of these commands is as follows Card status change INS OUS Diagnosis commands Card installation Card deletion Remote reset LPR programme download requests ISDN automatic setup requests BRI card Signalling Bit Monitor requests T1 E1 Line trace start requests T1 E1 ISDN QSIG Protocol Data Trace start requests Time setting CS programme download requests File deletion When a function other tha...

Page 91: ...nsfer PC to PBX SD Card utility see 2 6 2 Utility File Transfer PC to PBX SD Card they are stored as the backup files To use these files on the PBX it is necessary to first swap them with the currently active files on the SD memory card To update system files and reset the PBX 1 From the Utility menu point to System Reset and then click Reset by the Command 2 Choose whether to back up current syst...

Page 92: ... without copying files If the reset command was not carried out correctly an error message will be displayed and you will be returned to the main screen After resetting the PBX with this command it is necessary to reconnect to the PBX to continue programming 92 PC Programming Manual 2 6 21 Utility System Reset Reset by the Command ...

Page 93: ... that the PC uses correctly specified Is the baud rate correct The default setting and a safe rate is 19 200 bps Is the password correct Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via USB A Is the USB cable firmly connected to both the PC and the KX DT300 series KX T7600 series DPT with a USB Module Is the US...

Page 94: ...sfer PC to PBX SD Card Maintenance Console Software Q How do I confirm the software version of the PBX or installed cards A From 3 1 1 1 Slot click Summary Summary information including software versions is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX Q Not all of the characters of a setting can be displayed because the column is too narrow A Move the mouse to the line between the names of 2 setti...

Page 95: ...tation within transmission range of the CS Has the Portable Station previously been registered at another location It is not possible to register a Portable Station at 2 locations so use the Forced De registration option to delete the previous registration Q I cannot delete the extension number of a Portable Station A First de register the Portable Station itself and then delete the extension numb...

Page 96: ...us and then back to INS status Q How do I change the extension numbering plan from 3 digit numbers to 4 digit numbers A Perform the following steps 1 Open the 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main screen 2 Enter a 2 digit number in Leading Number or change No of Additional Digits from x to xx For more details see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan in Numbering Q How do I set a 3 digit numb...

Page 97: ...sibly overlap with another Leading Number So for example if 2 is already set as a Leading Number it is not possible to set 21 as another Leading Number because of the possible overlap of extension numbers The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by A feature number Another extension block A Dial setting see 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Quick Dialling see 4 10 2 6 2 Numbe...

Page 98: ...r An extension A Dial setting see 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Quick Dialling see 4 10 2 6 2 Numbering Plan Quick Dial In any of these cases choose another number Q I cannot change a feature number on the B NA DND Call Feature screen A The number you are trying to store is already being used by another call feature Please choose a different number Q How do I prevent extension numbers being automatically ass...

Page 99: ...he PBX s battery backup memory Incoming Call Log Outgoing Call Log including Last Number Redial Message Waiting SMDR Advice of Charge AOC Pay Tone Hospitality guest billing data ICD Group monitor log for supervisor PBX date and time Timed Reminder LPR Timed Update time PT handset headset volume PT SP PHONE volume PT ring volume PT display contrast ICD Group login status All extensions are set to L...

Page 100: ...ort Type of the port you want to use to either QSIG Slave or QSIG Master Q How do I change the type of an extension port A Set the port to OUS status Then change DPT Type Type in the 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port window Q I have set the type of an extension port to DSS Console but I cannot apply this setting Error E000402 A The number entered in DPT Type Location No on the 3 24 1 1 Sl...

Page 101: ... extensions associated with a COS from making trunk calls set all trunk groups for that COS to Block blue Q How do I modify the hold operation for SLTs A It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT using the SLT SLT Hold Mode option on the 4 18 2 9 System Options screen For more details see 1 13 1 Call Hold of the Feature Guide Q How do I set up an Incoming Call Dis...

Page 102: ...dd in a blank cell of the Extension Number column 3 Set Delayed Ring as necessary 4 Click Apply Note that it is necessary to set the extension number of the ICD group in advance Q I cannot set system speed dialling numbers from PC Console A Set the COS of the extension to which PC Console is connected to Manager class by setting Manager on the Extension Feature tab of the 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Servi...

Page 103: ...Section 3 1 Configuration PC Programming Manual 103 ...

Page 104: ...ttom of the screen for the virtual slots Select Shelf will be shown under the mouse pointer 2 Click Select Shelf To install a new shelf to the PBX KX TDE600 only 1 Move the mouse pointer over the first greyed PBX image at the bottom of the screen Pre Install will be shown under the mouse pointer 2 Click Pre Install 3 Click Yes to confirm To select a different shelf of the PBX KX TDE600 only 1 Move...

Page 105: ... service status Click OUS to set the card to out of service status To install an option card on an OPB3 card 1 Move the mouse pointer over the card A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer 2 Select Option Card The OPB3 Option Card Setup screen will be displayed See 3 60 1 1 Slot OPB3 Option Card Setup To access IP PT port properties 1 Click the IP Phone Registration button Supported Card Types...

Page 106: ...ion Interface Card LCOT4 4 Port Analogue Trunk Card KX TDE100 6 KX TDE200 8 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type LCOT8 8 Port Analogue Trunk Card LCOT16 16 Port Analogue Trunk Card DID8 8 Port DID Card KX TDE100 6 KX TDE200 8 3 49 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type BRI4 4 Port BRI Card KX TDE100 6 KX TDE200 8 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type BRI8 8 Port BRI Card PRI23 PRI Card 23B channe...

Page 107: ... KX TDE100 KX TDE200 Installation Manual 1 3 1 Optional Equipment 3 3 1 IPCMPR Card 3 4 1 Virtual Cards KX TDE600 Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming IPCEMPR IP Convergence Main Processing Card 1 fixed in Slot 11 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR DHLC8 8 Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card 40 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type DLC8 8 Port Digital Extension Card DLC16 16 Port Digital Exte...

Page 108: ...GW16 16 Channel VoIP Gateway Card OPB3 Optional 3 Slot Base Card 16 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property EECHO16 16 Channel Echo Canceller Card 8 None V IPEXT32 Virtual 32 Channel VoIP Extension Card 4 3 14 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IP Extension V SIPEXT32 Virtual 32 Channel SIP Extension Card 4 3 17 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual SIP Extension V IPGW16 Virtual 16 Channel VoIP Gateway Card 2 3 9 ...

Page 109: ...ter the name Value Range Card Type for KX TDE100 KX TDE200 DHLC8 8 Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card DLC16 16 Port Digital Extension Card DLC8 8 Port Digital Extension Card MSLC16 16 Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card with Message Lamp Card SLC8 8 Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card SLC16 16 Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card CSLC16 16 Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card...

Page 110: ... PRI23 PRI Card 23B channels PRI30 PRI Card 30B channels T1 T 1 Trunk Card E1 E 1 Trunk Card E M8 8 Port E M Trunk Card DID8 8 Port DID Card IP GW4 4 Channel VoIP Gateway Card OPB3 Optional 3 Slot Base Card IP GW16 16 Channel VoIP Gateway Card IP EXT16 16 Channel VoIP Extension Card EECHO16 16 Channel Echo Canceller Card IPCEMPR MPR Card Maintenance Console Location 3 2 1 1 Slot Summary Programmin...

Page 111: ...1 Slot Feature Guide References None Version Indicates the LPR version of the installed card reference only For IP EXT cards both the LPR version and the VoIP version are displayed The LPR version is shown on the left and the VoIP version on the right as follows Example 1 002 1 001 Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location 3 2 1 1 Slot Summary Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Sl...

Page 112: ...3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References None Card Type Indicates the type of virtual VoIP card installed in each slot of the virtual shelf reference only Value Range V IPEXT32 Virtual 32 Channel VoIP Extension Card V SIPEXT32 Virtual 32 Channel SIP Extension Card V IPGW16 Virtual 16 Channel VoIP Gateway Card V SIPGW16 Virtual 16 Channel SIP Trunk Card V IPCS4 Virtual 4 IP Cell Station Interface Card...

Page 113: ...rences None Status Indicates the card status reference only Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Pre Install A card has been added to the slot Idle No card is installed in the slot Maintenance Console Location 3 2 1 1 Slot Summary Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References None PC Program...

Page 114: ...phones can be used IPCMPR ID for KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR ID for KX TDE600 Indicates the ID number of the IPCMPR IPCEMPR card reference only Value Range ID number of the IPCMPR IPCEMPR card Maintenance Console Location 3 3 1 1 Slot Activation Key Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Activated Feature Indicates the type of activation keys reference only Note that the ...

Page 115: ...e ch 32 Maintenance Console Location 3 3 1 1 Slot Activation Key Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None The number of activated feature by Activation Key File in SD Card Indicates the number of channels or CA users provided by activation key files on the SD memory card reference only Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 3 1 1 Slot Activation Key Progr...

Page 116: ...s provided by the DSP card and activation key files on the SD memory card reference only Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 3 1 1 Slot Activation Key Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 116 PC Programming Manual 3 3 1 1 Slot Activation Key ...

Page 117: ...ature Guide References 2 4 5 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Assignment MAC Address for IPCMPR Card Indicates the MAC address of the IPCMPR card reference only Value Range 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None IP Address for IPCMPR Card Specifies the IP address of ...

Page 118: ... Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None IP Address for VoIP DSP Specifies the IP address of either the DSP16 or DSP64 card This parameter is only available for entering values when DHCP Client is disabled Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual Referenc...

Page 119: ...e default gateway for the network This parameter is only available for entering values when DHCP Client is disabled Value Range 0 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Speed Duplex for Main Port Specifies the connection mode of the main port The connection is made in 100Mbps half duplex ...

Page 120: ...ll duplex 100Mbps half duplex 10Mbps full duplex 10Mbps half duplex Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None LAN Disconnect Decision Time Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before disconnecting LAN connection when no communication via the LAN is detected Value Range 1 10 s Maintenance Console Locati...

Page 121: ... DHCP Time Out Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive IP addressing information from a DHCP server Value Range 1 30 s Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 5 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Assignment VoIP DSP Option DSP Card Type Indicates the type of the installed DSP card refere...

Page 122: ...n 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None IPCMPR SVM TS Circuit Availability Specifies whether the built in ESVM card of the PBX is enabled or disabled Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Messag...

Page 123: ...1 17 4 Background Music BGM Version Indicates the programme software file version of the installed DSP card reference only Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Jitter Compensation Operation for G 711 Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for voice communications using the G 71...

Page 124: ...erences None Feature Guide References None Jitter Compensation Operation for G 729A Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for communications using the G 729A codec Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Jitter Buffer Delay Min for Voice Specifies the minimum size of the jitter b...

Page 125: ...200 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Jitter Buffer Delay Init for Voice Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for voice communications Value Range 0 200 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Progr...

Page 126: ...for FAX Specifies the minimum size of the jitter buffer for fax communications Value Range 0 200 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Jitter Buffer Delay Max for FAX Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for fax communications Value Range 0 200 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card P...

Page 127: ...daptation Period for FAX Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for fax communications Value Range 1000 65530 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DTMF Detection Level for G 711A Specifies the level of DTMF detection for the G 711A codec Value Range 45 12 dB Maintenance Console Loc...

Page 128: ...de References None CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 ON Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal Value Range 20 5000 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 2 OFF Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is dete...

Page 129: ...nance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CED Signal Fixation Detection Time Specifies the minimum length of time required for the CED called station identification signal to be detected by the PBX Value Range 50 n n 1 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References N...

Page 130: ...rk to PBX µ Law Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax signals after being converted from T 38 protocol packets when the codec used is G 711µ Value Range 7 8 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DSP CODEC G 711 only SIP extension Specifies whether or not to only use the G 711 codec for SIP extension c...

Page 131: ...ot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings Feature Guide References None DSP CODEC Priority 1 value only others Specifies whether or not to only use the priority 1 codec set for the following types of calls IP extension calls SIP trunk calls Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virt...

Page 132: ...s None LOGIN Port Number Specifies the port number used to login to the PBX via the LAN Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CTI Port Number Specifies the port number used to operate CTI via the LAN Value Range 0 65535 Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR 132 PC ...

Page 133: ...in Communication Assistant 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 9 Built in Communication Assistant Feature Guide References 1 32 3 CA Communication Assistant LAN Status LINK for Main Port Indicates the current connection status of the main port reference only Value Range Disconnect Connect Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References...

Page 134: ...le Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 5 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Assignment IP Address for IPCMPR Card Indicates the IP address of the IPCMPR card reference only Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual Refer...

Page 135: ...es the subnet mask address of the IPCMPR card reference only Value Range 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Default Gateway Indicates the IP address of the default gateway for the network reference only Value Range 0 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenan...

Page 136: ...when it is mounted on the IPCMPR card reference only Value Range None Not mounted 2 Standard IPCMEC card 3 Optional IPCMEC card 6M Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 8 Software Upgrading 136 PC Programming Manual 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR ...

Page 137: ...ve the mouse pointer over the IPCMPR IPCEMPR card and click SVM Property Slot Indicates the slot type reference only Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 5 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Sub Slot Indicates the sub slot number reference only Value Range Sub slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 5 1 1 Slot OPB3 C...

Page 138: ...reen to select the card command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Command Value Range For sub slot 1 2 Not applicable For sub slot 3 INS Built in ESVM card is activated OUS Built in ESVM card is not activated Maintenance Console Location 3 5 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References 3 6 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Card Command...

Page 139: ... The card is activated OUS The card is not activated Maintenance Console Location 3 5 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SVM Feature Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature It is possible to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature as an MSG card OGM feature or both Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Locat...

Page 140: ... an MSG card OGM feature It is possible to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature as an MSG card OGM feature or both Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 5 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property MSG Feature Feature Guide References 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM 140 PC Programming Manu...

Page 141: ...on 3 6 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Card Command Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the feature out of service Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 6 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Card Command Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 141 3 6 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Card Command ...

Page 142: ...erences None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 7 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Gateway Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desire...

Page 143: ...e Guide References None Call Distribution Port Group Specifies a call distribution port group to which incoming trunk calls are directed through the virtual VoIP gateway port Value Range 1 16 Maintenance Console Location 3 7 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Gateway Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 2 3 Call Distribution Port Group PC Programming Manual 143 3 7 ...

Page 144: ...mand Programming Manual References 3 7 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Gateway Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 8 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Gateway Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 7 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Gateway Port Feature Guide References None 144 PC Progra...

Page 145: ...mming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Call Signalling Model Specifies whether to carry out a call control H 225 process directly between the cards or through a gatekeeper Value Range Direct GateKeeper Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Gatekeeper Connection Checking Interv...

Page 146: ... Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Primary Gatekeeper Port Number Specifies the port number of the primary gatekeeper Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 146 PC Program...

Page 147: ...port number of the secondary gatekeeper Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None H 225 Port Number Specifies the port number for the H 225 protocol call control in an H 323 protocol suite Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gate...

Page 148: ...es the TCP port number for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None QSIG Connectionless Tunneling UDP Port Number Specifies the UDP port number for connectionless tunnelling between gateway...

Page 149: ...1 65000 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None RTCP Packet Sending Ability Specifies whether to enable the PBX to send RTCP packets Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References Non...

Page 150: ...cifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field of the packet Value Range ToS DSCP HEX Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None RTP QoS ToS Priority Specifies the priority level in the ToS field Value Range 0 7 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Progra...

Page 151: ...ences None RTP QoS DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ Value Range 0 63 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None RTP QoS HEX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number Value Range 00 FF Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP...

Page 152: ...References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT DSP Digital Gain Down Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT DSP Digital Gain Up Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path Value R...

Page 153: ...y Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT NLP Setting Specifies the NLP Non Linear Processor setting to control echo sound quality Value Range Disable Weak Normal Strong Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprie...

Page 154: ...estination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network When using the Centralised VM feature set this to No Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 4 3 Call Forwarding CF by QSIG Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each trunk Value Range Public Private VPN Maintenance ...

Page 155: ...PBX sends dialled digits one at a time Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network Overlap First digit Timer T302 1 Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a dial number must be dialled after seizing a virtual IP trunk Value Range 5 30 s ...

Page 156: ...ange 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Incoming Call Voice Activity Detection for G 711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G 711 codec This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being ...

Page 157: ...helf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Voice Codec Priority 2nd Specifies the second highest priority codec type Value Range None G 711A G 711µ G 729A Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Voice Codec Priority 3rd Specifies the third high...

Page 158: ... ms 30 ms 40 ms 50 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Packet Sampling Time for G 711µ Specifies the time interval between measurements samples of sound data during a conversation The smaller this number the higher the quality of the transmitted sound Value Range 10 ms 20 ms 30 ms 40 m...

Page 159: ... FAX Detection Ability feature Since fax signals using a codec other than G 711 cannot be received accurately at the destination this feature automatically switches the codec to G 711 to enable end to end fax signal relay over the network Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property ...

Page 160: ...2833 Value Range 96 127 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T 38 FAX Max Datagram Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T 38 protocol Value Range 272 512 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Ref...

Page 161: ...pecifies the redundancy count for T 30 messages when using the T 38 protocol Value Range 0 7 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T 38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T 38 protocol Value Range 0 3 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slo...

Page 162: ... Guide References None Timer T301 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call Value Range 0 18000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call Applies to overlap receiving Value Range ...

Page 163: ...enance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call Applies to overlap sending Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Referen...

Page 164: ...eply after receiving the Release message Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T309 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect the data link before disconnecting the call Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf P...

Page 165: ...None Feature Guide References None T313 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T316 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message Value...

Page 166: ...nance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T319 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 16...

Page 167: ...e PBX tries to establish L2 in Permanent mode Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T3D9 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in Call by Call mode Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtua...

Page 168: ...Feature Guide References None 168 PC Programming Manual 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway ...

Page 169: ... 3 10 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GK Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Device Name Specifies the name of the device for programming reference Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 3 10 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GK Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manu...

Page 170: ...elf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None GW IP Address Specifies the IP address of the destination gateway device Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None GW Group Specifies the numbe...

Page 171: ... TDA Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Protocol Specifies the type of protocol for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network Value Range TCP UDP Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settin...

Page 172: ...ure Guide References None Option 1 GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None IP Codec Priority 1st 2nd 3rd Specifies the priority of the codecs to be used For fax communic...

Page 173: ...d sound Value Range 10 ms 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 50 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Packet Sampling Time G 711Mu Specifies the time interval between measurements samples of sound data during a conversation The smaller this number the higher the quality of the transmitted so...

Page 174: ...ide References None Option 2 GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Voice Activity Detection for G 711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G...

Page 175: ...to end fax signal relay over the network Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings Programming Manual References 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings Option 1 IP Codec Priority 1st 2nd 3rd Feature Guide References None DTMF Specifies the method to transport DTMF tones Value Range Inband Outband RFC2833...

Page 176: ...arameter is only necessary if DTMF is set to Outband RFC2833 Value Range 96 127 Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 176 PC Programming Manual 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings ...

Page 177: ...IP Gateway DN2IP Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Remaining Number of Digits Specifies the number of digits to be dialled following the leading number to access the destination Value Range 0 29 Maintenance Console Location 3 12 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway DN2IP Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None GW No GW Group Selection S...

Page 178: ...e Console Location 3 12 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway DN2IP Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None GW No Specifies the number of the destination gateway device This setting is only available when GW No GW Group Selection on this screen is set to GW No Value Range 1 100 Maintenance Console Location 3 12 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway DN2IP Programm...

Page 179: ...tion 3 13 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Hunt Pattern Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Call Distribution Port Group 1st 16th Specifies the number of the call distribution port group to which incoming calls are directed in priority Value Range For 1st CDPG1 CDPG16 For 2nd 16th None CDPG1 CDPG16 Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Vir...

Page 180: ...ver Specifies the UDP port used by the V IPEXT card to transmit and receive MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol data This must be changed if another network application is using the same port To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual Referenc...

Page 181: ...layed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range 1 65024 Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Voice RTP UDP Port No IP PT Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP Realtime Transfer Protocol data on the IP PT side This must b...

Page 182: ...g purposes and IP PTs cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these circumstances Do not use debugging settings unless instructed to do so To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range Disable 10 120 s Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1...

Page 183: ...al IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT First Resending Time MGCP Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range 500 n n 1 8 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Sl...

Page 184: ...erences 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time Value Range OFF 48 ms 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT DSP Digital Gain Down Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path Value R...

Page 185: ... Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT NLP Setting Specifies the NLP Non Linear Processor setting to control echo sound quality Value Ran...

Page 186: ...tion 3 14 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT 186 PC Programming Manual 3 14 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IP Extension ...

Page 187: ...ration is successful the dialogue box will show Registration Completed Click Close Once the IP PT is successfully registered the status of the IP PT will update to show Registered De registration Follow the steps below to de register the IP PT 1 Click De registration A dialogue box will appear Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left 2 Highlight numbers and names and click ...

Page 188: ...perty Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Extension Number Specifies th...

Page 189: ...y Telephone IP PT Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Command This cell is only active when Status on this screen shows Registered Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is n...

Page 190: ...ation ID MAC Address Specifies the MAC address of the IP PT This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen is set to OUS Value Range 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF Maintenance Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Current IP Address Indicates the cu...

Page 191: ...ance Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Option Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Prop...

Page 192: ...he port Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Programmi...

Page 193: ... communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Headset OFF ON Turns on or off the use of a headset with the IP PT Value Range Headset OFF Headset ON Maintenance Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Programming ...

Page 194: ...selected the priority is G 722 G 711 G 729A When G 711 is selected the priority is G 711 G 729A G 722 is unavailable When G 729A is selected both G 711 and G 722 are unavailable Value Range G 711 G 729A G 722 Maintenance Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Packet Sampling...

Page 195: ...rval between measurements samples of sound data during a conversation The smaller this number the higher the quality of the transmitted sound Value Range 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT PC Programming Manual 195 3 15 1 1 Slot Port P...

Page 196: ...Command Programming Manual References 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Feature Guide References None 196 PC Programmi...

Page 197: ...n Hold Time Max Specifies the maximum length of time that the PBX holds information on the location of SIP Extensions To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range 10 3600 s Maintenance Console Location 3 17 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual SIP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol...

Page 198: ... 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual SIP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension SIP Session Timer Min Specifies the minimum length of time that the PBX waits before disconnecting SIP sessions when no communication is detected To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range 90 3...

Page 199: ...gital Gain for the down voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 17 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual SIP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension DSP Digital Gain Up Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 17 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual...

Page 200: ... Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension NLP Setting Specifies the NLP Non Linear Processor setting to control echo sound quality Value Range Disable Weak Normal Strong Maintenance Console Location 3 17 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual SIP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension 200 PC Programmin...

Page 201: ...gramming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 18 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual SIP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Extension Number Specifies the ...

Page 202: ...n 3 18 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual SIP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Command This cell ...

Page 203: ...en Automatic is selected the bearer mode is set to Speech automatically Value Range Automatic Speech Audio Maintenance Console Location 3 18 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual SIP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Packet Sampling Time G 711 G 722 Specifies the time interval between measurements samples of sound d...

Page 204: ...rty Virtual SIP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Voice Activity Detection for G 711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G 711 codec This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network Valu...

Page 205: ...during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network Value Range OFF ON Maintenance Console Location 3 18 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual SIP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension PC Programming Manual 205 3 18 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual SIP Extension Port ...

Page 206: ...t Port Property Virtual SIP Extension Port Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension OUS Takes the port out of service Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 19 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual SIP Extension Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 18 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual SIP Extension Port Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SI...

Page 207: ...ver Specifies the UDP port used by the V IPCS card to transmit and receive MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol data This must be changed if another network application is using the same port To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 3 20 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None F...

Page 208: ...isplayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range 1 65024 Maintenance Console Location 3 20 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Voice RTP UDP Port No IP CS Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP Realtime Transfer Protocol data on the IP CS side This must be changed if another network applicati...

Page 209: ...debugging purposes and IP CSs cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these circumstances Do not use debugging settings unless instructed to do so To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range Disable 10 120 s Maintenance Console Location 3 20 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None F...

Page 210: ...1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None First Resending Time MGCP Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range 500 n n 1 8 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 20 1 1 Slot Card Prope...

Page 211: ... Manual References None Feature Guide References None Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time Value Range OFF 48 ms 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 20 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DSP Digital Gain Down Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console ...

Page 212: ...anual References None Feature Guide References None EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 20 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None NLP Setting Specifies the NLP Non Linear Processor setting to control echo sound quality Value Range Disable Weak Normal Strong 212 PC Programming Manu...

Page 213: ...Maintenance Console Location 3 20 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 213 3 20 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IPCS ...

Page 214: ...gistration Completed Click Close Once the IP CS is successfully registered the status of the IP CS will update to show Registered De registration Follow the steps below to de register the IP CS 1 Click De registration A dialogue box will appear Registered IP CSs are displayed on the left 2 Highlight IP CSs and click the right arrow to select them for de registration Click Next A dialogue box will ...

Page 215: ...t Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CS Name Specifies the CS name of the port Value Range Max 20 characters PC Programming Manual 215 3 21 1 1...

Page 216: ...active when Status on this screen shows Registered Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Status Indicates whether a certain IP CS is registered reference only Value Range None Regi...

Page 217: ... Address Indicates the current IP address of the IP CS reference only Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Program Ver Indicates the programme software file version of the IP CS reference only Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Por...

Page 218: ... 11 5 Air Synchronisation Feature Guide References None Air Sync Group Name Indicates the name of the Air Synchronisation Group of the IP CS reference only Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References 5 29 3 11 Air Synchronisation Group 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Feature Guide References None Option Slot Indicates...

Page 219: ...y Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CS Name Specifies the CS name of the port Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None PC Programming Manual 219 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual ...

Page 220: ...aintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None IP Codec Priority Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data Value Range G 711 G 729A Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Packet Sa...

Page 221: ...40 ms 50 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Voice Activity Detection for G 711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G 711 codec This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the...

Page 222: ...Feature Guide References None 222 PC Programming Manual 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS ...

Page 223: ...ion Command Programming Manual References 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 22 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 223 3 22 1 1 S...

Page 224: ...erty Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SLT Pulse Dial Mode Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area Value Range Normal Sweden New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SLT Off Hook Time Specifies the minimum length that...

Page 225: ...ue Range 8 n n 12 63 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SLT Pulse Maximum Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial Value Range 8 n n 9 20 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Gui...

Page 226: ...e Range Disable The PBX disconnects the line to prevent placing the call on hold Enable The PBX places the call on consultation hold Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 13 3 Call Splitting Flash Timing Min Specifies the minimum length that a signal sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognise it ...

Page 227: ...nces None Feature Guide References None DTMF R STD Detection Time Specifies the minimum length that a DTMF tone must be for the PBX to recognise it as a DTMF tone Value Range 2 n n 1 31 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SLT Power Supply Selects the voltage that enables an SLT to activate the M...

Page 228: ...le with SLC8 cards Value Range None Caller ID Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Installation Manual References For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 3 6 6 EXT CID Card KX TDA0168 For KX TDE600 3 8 6 EXT CID Card KX TDA0168 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None APT SLT Parallel Ring Enables an SLT connected in parallel to an APT to ring with the AP...

Page 229: ...nsole Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 9 Parallelled Telephone PC Programming Manual 229 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type ...

Page 230: ...lf number Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port or channel number re...

Page 231: ...PEXT Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 1 1 Extension Port Configuration Telephone Type Indicates the connected telephone type reference only The number of all connected telephones and Cell Stations can be viewed by clicking Port Type View Value Range DPT 40V DPT is connected APT 15V APT is connected...

Page 232: ...and Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the PBX Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Programming Manual References 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port Value Range Max 5 digit...

Page 233: ...nt extension numbers This is called XDP Mode Off XDP disabled The main telephone and sub telephone both have the main telephone s extension number This is called Parallel Mode Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 9 Parallelled Telephone 2 1 1 Extension Port Configuration Parallel Telephone Ringing S...

Page 234: ...lephone all SDN buttons customised for that device will be deleted When you attempt to apply the new settings a warning message is displayed showing the slot and port number for which SDN buttons will be deleted If you do not wish to delete SDN buttons for this port click Cancel Value Range Normal For connecting a DPT or CS DSS For connecting a DSS Console A maximum of 8 with the KX TDE100 KX TDE2...

Page 235: ...or which SDN buttons will be deleted If you do not wish to delete SDN buttons for this port click Cancel Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 8 For KX TDE600 Location number for DSS Console 1 64 Location number for PC Console 1 8 Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration...

Page 236: ...Type Air Sync Group No Assigns an Air Synchronisation Group number to the CS This setting is only available when DPT Type Type on this screen is set to Normal Value Range None 1 Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Programming Manual References 5 29 3 11 Air Synchronisation Group 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Feature Guide References None DPT Type Air Sync Group ...

Page 237: ...erty Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 4 Headset Operation Ringing Tone Selects the dual tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls when Port Type on this screen is set to DPT DPT S DPT S Hybrid S Hybrid SLT or S Hybrid S DPT This setting is not available for the KX T7200 the KX T7451 APTs or SLTs Value Range A 64 ms 697 Hz 64 ms 852 Hz...

Page 238: ...Feature Guide References None 238 PC Programming Manual 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port ...

Page 239: ...4 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide Referenc...

Page 240: ...pe View Programming Manual References 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide References None Total Count Indicates the total number of each type of telephone and CS connected to the PBX reference only CSs are counted on the basis of the number of CSIF ports in service plus the number of extension ports to which CSs are connected Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Loca...

Page 241: ...aintenance Console Location 3 27 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 27 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port ...

Page 242: ...Value Range INS The Cell Station CS is in service OUS The CS is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the CS Maintenance Console Location 3 27 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port Programming Manual References 3 28 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None CS Name Specifies the name of the CSIF port Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance C...

Page 243: ... Group 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Feature Guide References None Air Sync Group Name Indicates the name of the Air Synchronisation Group of the CS reference only Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 27 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port Programming Manual References 5 29 3 11 Air Synchronisation Group 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Feature Guide References None PC Programming ...

Page 244: ...ences 3 27 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the CS out of service This enables a temporary non use of the CS for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 28 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 27 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port Feature Guide References None...

Page 245: ... seizing a trunk before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 0 5 n n 1 16 s Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CO Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on ...

Page 246: ...intenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Bell Detection Bell Off Detection Timer Specifies the duration of the bell off detection timer If the PBX receives no bell signal from the telephone company for the length of time specified here the PBX treats the call as lost Value Range 1 0 s 15 0 s Maintenance Console...

Page 247: ...the pulse inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 630 ms 830 ms 1030 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Low Speed Pulse Dial Pulse Break Specifies the break for a low speed pulse dial This is the ratio between the brea...

Page 248: ...t Feature Guide References None Low Speed Pulse Dial Make Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a low speed pulse dial Low Speed Pulse Dial Pulse Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here Value Range 4 n n 3 15 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Feature...

Page 249: ...e 4 n n 4 18 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Feature Guide References None High Speed Pulse Dial Make Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a high speed pulse dial High Speed Pulse Dial Pulse Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here Value Range 4 n ...

Page 250: ...hat is installed on the LCOT card reference only Value Range None Caller ID Card Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Caller ID Detection Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID Signalling Selects the type of Caller ID signalling provided by the telephone company Value Range FSK FS...

Page 251: ... 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID FSK Carrier Detection Enables the PBX to detect the carrier when receiving Caller ID To enable this setting Caller ID Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID FS...

Page 252: ...able Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID FSK Detection Start Timer Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before attempting to detect Caller ID information after receiving a call To enable this setting Caller ID Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to...

Page 253: ...ferences 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID DTMF Start Code 1 and Start Code 2 Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series Start Code 1 is prior to Start Code 2 Value Range None A B C D Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID DTMF Information Sta...

Page 254: ...rty LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID DTMF Information Code PRIVATE OUT OF AREA TECHNICAL REASON UNKNOWN NUMBER RESTRICTED NUMBER Specifies the number used to identify each type of information code Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manu...

Page 255: ...e frequency of the pay tone appropriate to your telephone company Value Range 12kHz 16kHz Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 3 Call Charge Services Pay Tone Pay Tone Gain Specifies the signal strength of the pay tone Value Range 0 31 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type P...

Page 256: ...nces 1 26 3 Call Charge Services Pay Tone Pay Tone Pulse MAX Specifies the maximum length that a received pay tone signal can be for the PBX to recognise it as a pay tone signal Value Range None 8 n n 1 250 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 3 Call Charge Services Pay Tone Pay Tone Pulse Interval Spe...

Page 257: ...ne Sending Flash while end talk Enables the PBX to send a flash signal at the end of call to demand a pay tone signal Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 3 Call Charge Services PC Programming Manual 257 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type ...

Page 258: ...sole Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number 258 PC Prog...

Page 259: ...mn and then click Command Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Maintenance Console Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References 3 31 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Busy Out Status Indicates the Busy Out status reference only Value Range Normal Busy Out Maintenance Console Location 3 30...

Page 260: ...equired by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line When None is selected here the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected Value Range None 6 5 ms 8 n n 1 112 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 10 Calling Party Control CP...

Page 261: ... Manual References None Feature Guide References None Reverse Detection Selects the type of trunk call for which the reverse signal from the telephone company is detected Value Range Disable For no trunk call Outgoing For outgoing trunk calls only Both Call For both outgoing and incoming trunk calls Maintenance Console Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References Non...

Page 262: ...tection Enables the PBX to receive a pay tone signal from the telephone company Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 3 Call Charge Services Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause Value Range 1 5 s 2 5 s 3 5 s 4 5 s Maintenance Console Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO...

Page 263: ...ort Property LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 7 External Feature Access EFA Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected during which the PBX cannot seize the line Value Range 0 5 s 1 5 s 2 0 s 4 0 s 12 0 s Maintenance Console Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Referen...

Page 264: ...3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 31 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Feature Guide References None 264 PC ...

Page 265: ...eature Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T202 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the request to use an ISDN line as a TIE line Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave ...

Page 266: ...Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call Applies to overlap receiving Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References Non...

Page 267: ...mum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call Applies to overlap sending Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T305 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC disconnection message to ISDN Valu...

Page 268: ...References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T309 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link before disconnecting the call Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T310 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX ...

Page 269: ...lue Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T316 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programm...

Page 270: ...ecifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T322 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message Value Rang...

Page 271: ...ure Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T3D9 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in Call by Call mode Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T200 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after se...

Page 272: ...0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T203 Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2 Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Reference...

Page 273: ...ween each digit on an incoming call Applies to overlap receiving Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP call setting message to ISDN Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Co...

Page 274: ... ISDN Extension T305 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC disconnection message to ISDN Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T306 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC d...

Page 275: ...0 6000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T308 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual Ref...

Page 276: ...ISDN Extension T310 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T312 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP c...

Page 277: ... 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T320 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for packet protocol Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ...

Page 278: ... that the PBX tries to establish L2 in Permanent mode Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T3D9 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in Call by Call mode Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card ...

Page 279: ...Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 279 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type ...

Page 280: ...e Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number 280 PC Program...

Page 281: ...Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY 1 30 4 1 QSIG Standard Features SUMMARY Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port comma...

Page 282: ...ing Manual References None Feature Guide References None Status Message Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network Value Range No Transmission Status Message is not sent When Mandatory error detection Send the Status Message when an error Mandatory is detected When Option Mandatory error detection Send the Status Message when an error Option or Mandatory is detected Maintenance Co...

Page 283: ...ogramming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO Parameters for ISDN CO are not applicable for the BRI extension port Shelf KX TDE600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position refere...

Page 284: ...n in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group In this case an MSN can be assigned Value Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private...

Page 285: ...erty BRI Port Programming Manual References 3 34 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line I...

Page 286: ...er digit timer expires Overlap The PBX sends dialled digits one at a time Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Extension Inter digit 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 2 ISDN en Bloc Dial as End of Dial for en Bloc mode 5 4 3 1 4 Dialling Plan Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Int...

Page 287: ...to P MP Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Networking Data Transfer Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG Slave or QSIG Master A maximum of two ports of each BRI card can be assigned ...

Page 288: ...ual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 11 ISDN Extension Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property ...

Page 289: ...te network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 11 ISDN Extension Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Command Va...

Page 290: ...ng with 0 or 00 This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to Extension Value Range Ring All Extension for MSN Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN Ring an Extension for MSN Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Refer...

Page 291: ...y Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 291 3 33 1 1 Slot...

Page 292: ...assigned Value Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This col...

Page 293: ...ds 6 SwissNET2 7 SwissNET3 8 Euro ISDN Standard 14 France Domestic 19 Finland 20 Norway 27 Australia 51 US National ISDN 2 Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY L1 Mode Selects the active mode of L1 Layer 1 on the BRI port Value Range Call Permanent Main...

Page 294: ...1 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY Access Mode Selects the configuration of the BRI port Value Range P P Point to Point P MP Point to multipoint Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY TEI Mode Specifies the TEI mode assigned to the BRI...

Page 295: ...f position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming ...

Page 296: ...assigned Value Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This col...

Page 297: ...work Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service 1 30 3 Virtual Private Network VPN Calling Party number Numbering Plan ID Public Private Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks Value Range Unknown ISDN Telephony National St...

Page 298: ... the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks Value Range Unknown ISDN Telephony National Standard Private Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Called Party number Type of Number Public Private Selects the type of number that applies to incoming tru...

Page 299: ...3 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only PC Programming Manual 299 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Propert...

Page 300: ...n For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command...

Page 301: ...RI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 1 21 1 3 Advice of Charge AOC 1 21 1 5 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P 1 21 1 7 Call Transfer CT by ISDN 1 21 1 8 Three party Conference 3PTY by ISDN 1 21 1 10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation...

Page 302: ...nce only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None 302 PC Programming Manual 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port ...

Page 303: ...ce Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Command Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is...

Page 304: ...y BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS CCBS Delete Digits Specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number when receiving a call of the specified type initiated by the CCBS feature from the network CCBS Type on this screen specifies the applicable type of call Value Range 0 15 Maintenance Console...

Page 305: ...3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 34 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Feature Guide References None PC Prog...

Page 306: ...ot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number 306 PC Programming Manual 3 35 1 1 S...

Page 307: ...to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY 1 30 4 1 QSIG Standard Features SUMMARY Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open ...

Page 308: ...detection Option Mandatory Send the Status Message when an error Option or Mandatory is detected Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Status Receive Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status of the call Value Range Ignore Ignore the Status Mes...

Page 309: ...nual References None Feature Guide References None Line Coding Selects the line coding type of the PRI PCM Pulse Code Modulation for the port This setting is only available when using the PRI23 card Value Range B8ZS AMI Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Frame Sequence Selects the type of frame sequence...

Page 310: ...0 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None 310 PC Programming M...

Page 311: ...ave port on another PBX ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group In this case an MSN can be assigned Value Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot...

Page 312: ...nual References 3 36 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation C...

Page 313: ...The PBX sends dialled digits one at a time Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Extension Inter digit 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 2 ISDN en Bloc Dial as End of Dial for en Bloc mode 5 4 3 1 4 Dialling Plan Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Networ...

Page 314: ...tion 11 9 Private Network Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Loopback Test started by Network Enables a loopback test started from the network side to be performed on the PRI23 card Note The version of the PRI23 card must be 2 000 or later Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References ...

Page 315: ...dicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None PC Programming Manual 315 3 35 1 ...

Page 316: ...master port Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Command Value Range INS The port is in se...

Page 317: ...MSN Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 11 ISDN Extension Network Configuration Shelf KX TDE600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Sl...

Page 318: ... Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group In this case an MSN can be assigned Value Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For c...

Page 319: ...sole Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References 3 36 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Network Type Selects the network type of the port Value Range 0 56 2 UK Domestic 5 Netherlands 6 SwissNET2 7 SwissNET3 8 Euro ISDN Standard 14 France Domestic 19 Finland 20 Norway 27 Australia 51 US National ISDN 2 Maintenance Consol...

Page 320: ...Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port 320 PC Programming Manual 3 35 1 1 Slot...

Page 321: ...slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column...

Page 322: ...ing Party Number Numbering Plan ID Public Private Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks Value Range Unknown ISDN Telephony National Standard Private Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Calling Party Number Type of Number Public Priva...

Page 323: ...nge Unknown ISDN Telephony National Standard Private Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Called Party Number Type of Number Public Private Selects the type of number that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks Value Range Unknown International National Network Subscrib...

Page 324: ...Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number 324 PC Programming Manual 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI...

Page 325: ...necting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click th...

Page 326: ...g Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 1 21 1 3 Advice of Charge AOC 1 21 1 5 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P 1 21 1 7 Call Transfer CT by ISDN 1 21 1 8 Three party Conference 3PTY by ISDN 1 21 1 10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG...

Page 327: ...its Specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number when receiving a call of the specified type initiated by the CCBS feature from the network CCBS Type on this screen specifies the applicable type of call Value Range 0 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 10 Completion of Calls to ...

Page 328: ...3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 36 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Feature Guide References None 328 PC ...

Page 329: ... Guide References None Frame Sequence Selects the type of frame sequence used for communications Value Range D4 ESF Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ESF Frame Sequence Selects the values for C bit and D bit To enable this setting Frame Sequence on this screen should be set to ESF Value Range C A D B C ...

Page 330: ...intenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None LIU Receive Option Selects the receiving level Receive Equalisation of LIU Value Range Automatic 6 dB 12 dB 18 dB 24 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 330 PC Programming Man...

Page 331: ...its after seizing a DDI DID or TIE line before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX This allows the telephone company or the other PBX to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 32 n n 1 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Answer Detectio...

Page 332: ...T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DTMF Tone DTMF Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 64 16 n n 0 11 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Refere...

Page 333: ...the DTMF tone to be received Value Range n 42 0 n 0 31 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Break Specifies the break for pulse digits This is the ratio between the break on hook signal and make off hook signal in a pulse dial Value Range 60 67 Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot...

Page 334: ...e pulse inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 630 ms 830 ms 1030 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial CO Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not For outgoing trunk calls a...

Page 335: ...dial Value Range 8 n n 9 20 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Minimum MAKE Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial Value Range 8 n n 1 5 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None PC Programming Manua...

Page 336: ...REAK Width OPX Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal from an SLT connected to an OPX Value Range 8 n n 3 63 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash Flash Width OPX Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal sent from an SLT connected to an OPX that the PBX can recogni...

Page 337: ...Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash Minimum BREAK Width TIE Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal sent from a TIE line Value Range 8 n n 3 63 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References N...

Page 338: ... Caller ID Start Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID Information End Code Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenan...

Page 339: ...D End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID PC Programming Manual 339 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type ...

Page 340: ...Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CH Indicates the channel number reference only Value Range Channel number 340 PC Program...

Page 341: ...click Command Value Range INS The channel is in service OUS The channel is out of service Fault The channel is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance C...

Page 342: ...ts the channel type Value Range Undefined Not assigned GCOT Ground Start Central Office LCOT Loop Start Central Office DDI DID Direct Dialling In Direct Inward Dialling TIE TIE Line OPX Off Premise Extension Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 23 1 T1 Line Service Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of...

Page 343: ...s only available when Channel Type on this screen is set to DDI DID Value Range None 80 n n 2 75 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 10 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection CPC Signal Detection LCO GCO Outgoing Incoming Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on ou...

Page 344: ... None CO Pulse Speed Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the T1 channel Value Range 10 pulse s 20 pulse s Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 4 Dial Type Selection Wink Signal Time Out Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk If a wink ...

Page 345: ...r expires Wink Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Sending Caller ID to TIE Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when the channel type is TIE Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Por...

Page 346: ... to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone This setting is only available when Channel Type on this screen is set to DDI DID Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Dial Tone to Extension Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension ma...

Page 347: ...ual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 1 5 4 9 Special Carrier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal Value Range None 16 n n 1 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 ...

Page 348: ...the PBX cannot seize the line Value Range 0 5 s 1 5 s 2 0 s 4 0 s 12 0 s Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 6 Flash Recall Terminate 348 PC Programming Manual 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port ...

Page 349: ...s 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the channel out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 39 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Feature Guide References None PC Pr...

Page 350: ...ole Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Frame Sequence Selects the type of frame sequence for the E1 card Value Range PCM30 PCM30 CRC Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Frame Option Selects the value for C bit and D bit Value Range...

Page 351: ...he dialled digits correctly Value Range 32 n n 1 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Answer Detection Timer Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to recognise the answer signal This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 32 n n...

Page 352: ...ting level Transmit Pulse Amplitude of LIU reference only Value Range Mode 1 Mode 8 Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None LIU Receive Option Selects the receiving level Receive Equalisation of LIU Value Range Automatic 6 dB 12 dB 18 dB 24 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type P...

Page 353: ...MF Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter digit pause Value Range 64 16 n n 0 11 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Break Specifies the break for pulse digits This is the ratio between the break on hook signal and make off hook signal in a pulse dial Value Range 60 6...

Page 354: ... Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the pulse inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 630 ms 830 ms 1030 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual Reference...

Page 355: ...l References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Maximum BREAK Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial Value Range 8 n n 9 20 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Minimum MAKE Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial Value ...

Page 356: ... Guide References None Flash Minimum BREAK Width Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal sent from an E1 line Value Range 8 n n 3 63 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash Flash Width Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal sent from an E1 line that the PBX can reco...

Page 357: ...es Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID Information End Code Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None P...

Page 358: ... the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID 358 PC Programming Manual 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type ...

Page 359: ...Inter digit Timer Specifies the pseudo answer time This setting is available only when Option 1 or Option 3 is selected in DR2 Setting Type on this screen Value Range 3 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Bit Position for Dial Pulse Selects the position of the pulse dial control bit...

Page 360: ... B bit Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Forced Release Enables the PBX to send a forced release signal Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 360...

Page 361: ...l Value Range Type 1 A bit 0 Type 2 A bit 1 Type 3 B bit 0 Type 4 B bit 1 Type 5 A bit 1 B bit 1 Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Wink Signal Width Specifies the length of a wink signal Value Range 32 n n 4 9 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line S...

Page 362: ...Length Answer Specifies the length of an answer signal Value Range 150 ms 600 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None E M P Pulse Length Clear Specifies the length of a clear signal Value Range 150 ms 600 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Se...

Page 363: ...Specifies the mode for call charge meter pulses Value Range No Detection Meter pulses are not sent or received Outgoing call only Sends a call charge meter pulse for outgoing trunk calls Both calls Sends and receives call charge meter pulses Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Meter Pu...

Page 364: ...ulse Value Range 8 n n 1 80 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DSP Gain Adjustment DTMF Transmit Specifies the output power of the DTMF signal sent from the DSP Digital Signal Processor Value Range 12 dB 3 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Sig...

Page 365: ...nces None DSP Gain Adjustment MFC R2 Transmit Specifies the output power of MFC R2 signals sent from the DSP Value Range 31 dB 0 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DSP Gain Adjustment MFC R2 Receive Specifies the strength range within which an MFC R2 signal must be for the DSP to r...

Page 366: ...gramming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Frame Error Detection Error Rate Specifies the number of frame errors per second which the PBX needs to recognise a remote alarm To enable this setting Frame Error Detection Error Detection on this screen should be set to Yes Value Range No limit 16 n n 1 7 errors s Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line S...

Page 367: ...ard Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ANI Service ANI Max digits Specifies the maximum number of digits to be received via ANI when receiving a call with ANI Value Range None 1 16 Maintenance Console Location 3 42 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None MFC R2 T...

Page 368: ...le Location 3 42 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None MFC R2 Timer Disappearance Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC R2 disappearance signal sent from the telephone company Value Range 1 30 s Maintenance Console Location 3 42 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References...

Page 369: ...es the code used to indicate the end of an ANI number Value Range ANI Complete 1 1 15 ANI Complete 2 4 Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 42 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group l Code Assignment ANI Reject Specifies the code used to reject an ANI number Value Range 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 42 1...

Page 370: ...References None Group l Code Assignment End of Digit Timer Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for further signal before detecting the end of digit of an ANI number Value Range 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 42 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group ll Code Assignment G ll Code Outgoing Call Specifies ...

Page 371: ...ctively Value Range Undefined Subscriber Operator Collect Call Maintenance Console Location 3 42 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group ll Code Assignment Group ll ANI Specifies the Group ll ANI start code Value Range 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 42 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Man...

Page 372: ...2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None MFC R2 Group 1 E1 MFC R2 Group1 code Specifies the code value of the Group 1 code when the received Group 1 code is Value Range 11 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 42 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 372 PC Programming Manual 3 42 1 1 Slot Ca...

Page 373: ...ignment ANI Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send an ANI number Value Range 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group A Code Assignment ANI N 1 Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the N 1 th digit of an ANI number Value ...

Page 374: ...mming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group A Code Assignment Set up Speech Path Specifies the setup speech path code sent to the telephone company Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group A Code Assignment First Request Specifies the code ...

Page 375: ...Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group A Code Assignment N 1 Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the N 1 th digit of an ANI number Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Sett...

Page 376: ...de Assignment N 3 Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the N 3 th digit of an ANI number Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group B Code Assignment Idle 1 Specifies the code used normally to inform the telephone company that ...

Page 377: ...nance Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group B Code Assignment Idle 3 Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is idle when the call is disconnected by the caller Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Pro...

Page 378: ... the telephone company that the received number is not defined Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group B Code Assignment Congestion Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the network is congested Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Con...

Page 379: ...ences None Group B Code Assignment No Billing Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the call is not charged Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group B Code Assignment Collect Call Reject Specifies the code used to inform the telephone com...

Page 380: ...Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 380 PC Programming Manual 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 ...

Page 381: ...Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CH Indicates the channel number reference only Value Range channel number PC Programming...

Page 382: ...click Command Value Range INS The channel is in service OUS The channel is out of service Fault The channel is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance C...

Page 383: ...Range Public Use the DIL DDI DID method to distribute incoming trunk calls Private Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY 1 30 1 TIE Line Service CO Dial Mode Se...

Page 384: ...ANI Automatic Number Identification numbers from the E1 line Value Range DTMF Pulse MFC R2 Undefined Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 22 1 E1 Line Service Receive Digits Specifies the maximum number of digits to be received from a DDI DID number when receiving a call with the DDI DID number Value Range 0 ...

Page 385: ... 75 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 10 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection DTMF Width Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the E1 channel Value Range 80 ms 160 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Referenc...

Page 386: ...he trunk is released Value Range 64 n n 1 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Start Signal Type Selects the type of the start signal Value Range Immediate Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires Wink Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is recei...

Page 387: ...e Receiving Caller ID from TIE Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when Channel Type on this screen is set to E M P or E M C Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Ringback Tone to Outside Caller Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network ...

Page 388: ...n 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Answer Wait Timer 60s Selects the length of time that the PBX waits for the called outside party to answer an outgoing trunk call The line will be disconnected automatically when this timer expires Value Range None 1 4 Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming M...

Page 389: ...ier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal Value Range None 16 n n 1 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None 16 n n 1 255 ms Feature Guide References None Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected during which the PBX cannot seize the line Value Range 0 5 s 1 5 s 2 0 s 4 0 s 1...

Page 390: ...Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 6 Flash Recall Terminate 390 PC Programming Manual 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port ...

Page 391: ...3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the channel out of service This enables a temporary non use of the channel for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 45 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Feature Guide References None PC P...

Page 392: ...ine before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX This allows the telephone company or the other PBX to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 32 n n 1 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Answer Detection Timer Specifies the length of time...

Page 393: ...e Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DTMF Tone DTMF Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 64 16 n n 0 11 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References N...

Page 394: ...ial transmission appropriate to your area Value Range Normal Sweden New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the pulse inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Rang...

Page 395: ...ce Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Maximum BREAK Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial Value Range 8 n n 9 20 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Mini...

Page 396: ...e Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash Minimum Break Width Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal Value Range 8 n n 3 63 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type Programming Manual References None 396 PC Programming Manual 3 ...

Page 397: ...ming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Line Signal Setting E M P Pulse Length Seizure Selects the length of a seizure pulse Value Range 150 ms 600 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Line Signal Setting E M P Pulse Length Answer Selects the length of an answer pulse Value Range 150 m...

Page 398: ...ance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Line Signal Setting E M P Pulse Length E M P Seizure ACK Enables the PBX to wait for an E M P seizure ACK signal Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 398 PC Programm...

Page 399: ...sed to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID Information End Code Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Proper...

Page 400: ... the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID 400 PC Programming Manual 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type ...

Page 401: ...e Location 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CH Indicates the channel number reference only Value Range Channel number PC Programmi...

Page 402: ...channel is out of service Fault The channel is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port Programming Manual References 3 48 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of the channel Value Range Public Use the DIL method to distribute incoming trunk calls Private ...

Page 403: ...t Port Property EM Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 4 Dial Type Selection Gain Adjustment Indicates the value for hardware adjustment fixed reference only Value Range 1 Maintenance Console Location 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DTMF Width Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the E M ...

Page 404: ...rt Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 4 Dial Type Selection Wink Signal Time Out Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk If a wink signal is not received before this timer expires the trunk is released Value Range 64 n n 1 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port Programming Manual ...

Page 405: ...eature Guide References None E M TIE Line Type Selects the type of the voice path for an E M line Value Range 2 wires 4 wires Maintenance Console Location 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Sending Caller ID to TIE Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when Trunk Property on this screen is set to Private Value Range No Yes...

Page 406: ...uide References None Send Ringback Tone to Outside Caller Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Dial Tone to Extension Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a ca...

Page 407: ...ual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 1 5 4 9 Special Carrier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal Value Range None 16 n n 1 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 ...

Page 408: ...the PBX cannot seize the line Value Range 0 5 s 1 5 s 2 0 s 4 0 s 12 0 s Maintenance Console Location 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 6 Flash Recall Terminate 408 PC Programming Manual 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port ...

Page 409: ... 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the channel out of service This enables a temporary non use of the channel for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 48 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port Feature Guide References None PC ...

Page 410: ... DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DTMF Tone DTMF Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 64 16 n n 0 11 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 49 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Ref...

Page 411: ...Slot Card Property DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the pulse inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 630 ms 830 ms 1030 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 49 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type Programming Manual Referenc...

Page 412: ...erences None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Maximum BREAK Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial Value Range 8 n n 9 20 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 49 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Minimum MAKE Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dia...

Page 413: ...e References None Caller ID Caller ID Start Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 49 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID Information End Code Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID seri...

Page 414: ...8 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 49 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID 414 PC Programming Manual 3 49 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type ...

Page 415: ...Location 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number PC Programming M...

Page 416: ...e Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Programming Manual References 3 51 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Dialling Mode Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the DID line Value Range DTMF Pulse Ma...

Page 417: ...which pulse dials are sent to the line Value Range 10 pulse s 20 pulse s Maintenance Console Location 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 4 Dial Type Selection Wink Signal Time Out Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk If a wink signal is not received before this timer expire...

Page 418: ... DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CPC Detection Time Out DID In DID Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line When None is selected here the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected Value Range None 80 n n 2 75 ms Maintenance Console Locati...

Page 419: ... is received from an analogue trunk Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Send Ringback Tone to Outside Caller Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Pro...

Page 420: ...rences None Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause Value Range 1 5 s 2 5 s 3 5 s 4 5 s Maintenance Console Location 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 1 5 4 9 Special Carrier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length of a flas...

Page 421: ...ct Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected during which the PBX cannot seize the line Value Range 0 5 s 1 5 s 2 0 s 4 0 s 12 0 s Maintenance Console Location 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 6 Flash Recall Terminate PC Programming Manual 421 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port ...

Page 422: ...3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 51 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Feature Guide References None 422 PC ...

Page 423: ...rences 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Extension Inter digit 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 2 ISDN en Bloc Dial as End of Dial for en Bloc mode 5 4 3 1 4 Dialling Plan Feature Guide References 1 30 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network QSIG CT Enables a call to be transferred to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console...

Page 424: ...tenance Console Location 3 52 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 4 3 Call Forwarding CF by QSIG 424 PC Programming Manual 3 52 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Gateway ...

Page 425: ...ntenance Console Location 3 53 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 53 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port nu...

Page 426: ... the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Command Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 3 53 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port Programming Manual References 3 54 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port Connection Command Feature Guide References Non...

Page 427: ... 53 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 54 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 53 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port Feature Guide References None PC...

Page 428: ...eferences 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask of the card Value Range 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 3 55 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Gateway Address Common Settings Displays the default gateway ad...

Page 429: ...unreachable and sets the port status to Fault During operation set between 10 s and 60 s Settings over 60 s and Disable are used for debugging purposes and IP PTs cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these circumstances Do not use debugging settings unless instructed to do so Value Range Disable 10 120 s Maintenance Console Location 3 55 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension Programming Manu...

Page 430: ...1 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT DSP Digital Gain Up Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 55 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 55 1 1 Slot...

Page 431: ...near Processor is used to control echo sound quality Value Range Use Non Linear Processor Use Fixed TX Gain Maintenance Console Location 3 55 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT PC Programming Manual 431 3 55 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension ...

Page 432: ...e RTP UDP Port No Server Specifies the UDP port used by the IP EXT card to transmit and receive RTP Realtime Transfer Protocol data This must be changed if another network application is using the same port For voice communications an IP EXT card uses 64 contiguous UDP ports starting from the port number specified here Value Range 1024 65472 Maintenance Console Location 3 56 1 1 Slot Card Property...

Page 433: ...fied here Value Range 1024 65472 Maintenance Console Location 3 56 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension Common Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT PC Programming Manual 433 3 56 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension Common Settings ...

Page 434: ... in progress the dialogue box will show Registration Executing If the registration is successful the dialogue box will show Registration Completed Click Close Once the IP PT is successfully registered the status of the IP PT will update to show Registered De registration Follow the steps below to de register the IP PT 1 Click De registration A dialogue box will appear Registered extension numbers ...

Page 435: ...elf number Maintenance Console Location 3 57 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 57 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Port...

Page 436: ...roprietary Telephone IP PT Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Command This cell is only active when Status on this screen shows Registered Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The ...

Page 437: ... IP PT IP Address Indicates the IP address of the IP PT reference only Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 3 57 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Headset OFF ON Turns on or off the use of a headset with the IP PT Value Range Headset OFF Headset ON Maintenance Consol...

Page 438: ...2 Hz Maintenance Console Location 3 57 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT IP Codec Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data Value Range G 711 G 729 Maintenance Console Location 3 57 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port Programming Manual References None ...

Page 439: ...smitted sound When IP Codec on this screen is set to G 711 only 20 ms and 30 ms are available Value Range 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 57 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT PC Programming Manual 439 3 57 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port ...

Page 440: ...X TDE600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Referen...

Page 441: ... Input Output Card ESVM2 2 Channel Simplified Voice Message Card ESVM4 4 Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Installation Manual References For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 3 1 Optional Equipment For KX TDE600 1 2 1 Optional Equipment Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Status Indicates the status of the option c...

Page 442: ...PB3 Card Property Card Command Feature Guide References None Port Number Indicates the port number of the mounted option card reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Status Indicates the port status of the mounted option card reference only Value Range INS The card is ...

Page 443: ...n Time Specifies the minimum duration of continuous input from the triggered sensor before the PBX recognises the input and makes a sensor call Value Range 32 n n 2 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 8 External Sensor Input Signal Detection Reopening Time Specifies the length of time after the sensor...

Page 444: ...isable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM MSG Feature Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card as an MSG card It is possible to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature as an MSG card OGM feature or both Value Range Disable Enable ...

Page 445: ...Feature Guide References 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM PC Programming Manual 445 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property ...

Page 446: ...rences None Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the card out of service Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 59 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Card Command Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pre INS Assigns the card type to a certain sub slot Pre installation Value Range MSG4 4 Channel Message Card DPH4 4 Port Doorphone Card DPH2 2 Port Doorphone...

Page 447: ... References For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 3 1 Optional Equipment For KX TDE600 1 2 1 Optional Equipment Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Delete Assigns the card type to be deleted from the sub slot Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 59 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Card Command Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Prog...

Page 448: ...t Card ESVM2 2 Channel Simplified Voice Message Card ESVM4 4 Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 3 60 1 1 Slot OPB3 Option Card Setup Installation Manual References For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 3 1 Optional Equipment For KX TDE600 1 2 1 Optional Equipment Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Feature Guide References None Slot 1 Slo...

Page 449: ... Port Doorphone Card DPH2 2 Port Doorphone Card ECHO16 16 Channel Echo Canceller Card EIO4 4 Port External Input Output Card ESVM2 2 Channel Simplified Voice Message Card ESVM4 4 Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 3 60 1 1 Slot OPB3 Option Card Setup Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Feature Guide References None PC Programm...

Page 450: ... PS will update to show Registered De registration Follow the steps below to de register the PS 1 Click De registration A dialogue box will appear Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left 2 Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for de registration Click Next A dialogue box will appear 3 Click Confirm If the de registration is successful the di...

Page 451: ...y Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 128 For KX TDE600 1 512 Maintenance Console Location 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 25 1 Portable Station PS Connection Extension No Specifies the extension number of the PS In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode the PS can be used as a sub telephone with a wired main telephone PT SLT and two of them will share...

Page 452: ...ue Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Programming Manual References 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main Extension Name Feature Guide References 1 25 1 Portable Station PS Connection Status Indicates whether a certain PS is registered reference only Value Range None Registered Maintenance Console Location 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Programm...

Page 453: ...Feature Guide References 1 25 1 Portable Station PS Connection PC Programming Manual 453 3 61 1 2 Portable Station ...

Page 454: ... be assigned automatically when a CS is connected to the PBX Without the Radio System ID PSs cannot be registered System Wireless System ID Indicates the radio system ID used to register a PS reference only Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 62 1 3 Option Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None New Card Installation Card Status for any Card Selects t...

Page 455: ...e Range ISDN Standard mode The CCBS CF CT and Centralised VM features are supported DIL and DID call distribution are available for the D channel T1 LCOT mode DIL and DID call distribution are available for all 23B channels The CCBS CF CT and Centralised VM features are not available in this mode Maintenance Console Location 3 62 1 3 Option Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Referenc...

Page 456: ...k source card to OUS then INS Note If multiple PBXs are used to establish a private network TIE line service QSIG network etc without being connected through the telephone company assign only one PBX as the clock source on the network That PBX should have a card connected to a telephone company line selected as its clock source All other PBXs should have cards connected to the network selected as ...

Page 457: ...Section 4 2 System PC Programming Manual 457 ...

Page 458: ...e and time Values can be entered by clicking the parameter you want to change and typing the new value or by clicking the up down arrows beside the date and time Value Range Year 2000 2099 Month 01 12 Day 01 31 Hour 00 23 Minute 00 59 Second 00 59 Maintenance Console Location 4 1 2 1 1 Date Time Date Time Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 458 PC Programming M...

Page 459: ...n provided by the network Value Range Disable ISDN Caller ID FSK SNTP Maintenance Console Location 4 2 2 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 5 Automatic Setup SNTP SNTP Server IP Address Specifies the IP address of an SNTP server Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 4 2 2 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving P...

Page 460: ...nance Console Location 4 2 2 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 5 Automatic Setup SNTP Time Zone Time Zone for PC Indicates the UTC Coordinated Universal Time time zone of the PC reference only Value Range 14 00 14 00 Maintenance Console Location 4 2 2 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Programming Manual References None Feature Guide...

Page 461: ... 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Daylight Saving Programming Manual References 4 2 2 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Feature Guide References 2 3 5 Automatic Setup Start Date Year Month Day Specifies the start date of daylight savings time Value Range Year 2000 2099 Month 1 12 Day 1 31 Maintenance Console Location 4 3 2 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Daylight Saving Programming Manual Re...

Page 462: ...th 1 12 Day 1 31 Maintenance Console Location 4 3 2 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Daylight Saving Programming Manual References 4 2 2 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Feature Guide References 2 3 5 Automatic Setup 462 PC Programming Manual 4 3 2 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Daylight Saving ...

Page 463: ...n 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM Programming Manual References 4 6 2 4 Week Table 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 2 2 5 Operator Features BGM and Music on Hold Music Source of BGM2 Selects the audio source of BGM2 Value Range External BGM Port 2 Internal BGM 1 Internal BGM 2 Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM Pr...

Page 464: ...BGM3 8 Card Selects the card IPCMPR ESVM Circuit or ESVM of the audio source of BGM Cards must have the MSG Feature setting enabled to be available for selection Value Range Available cards Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM Programming Manual References 3 5 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property MSG Feature 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property MSG Feature Feature Guide References 1 13 4 Music on ...

Page 465: ...on Transfer Selects the audio source for Music for Transfer either the same music source chosen for the Music on Hold or ringback tone Value Range Same as Music on Hold Ringback Tone Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 12 1 Call Transfer PC Programming Manual 465 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM ...

Page 466: ...tic Redial Repeat Interval Specifies the length of time between repeated Automatic Redial attempts Value Range 10 n n 1 360 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Automatic Redial Redial Call Ring Duration Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer an Automatic...

Page 467: ...ogue trunk is performed Value Range 0 15 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Dial Hot Line Pickup Dial Start Specifies the length of time between going off hook and the start of automatic dialling when the Hot Line feature is set Value Range 0 15 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers C...

Page 468: ...nt digits must be dialled before the PBX sends a reorder tone Value Range 1 250 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 2 Automatic Extension Release Dial Analogue CO First Digit Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a telephone number must be sent to an analogue trunk If no digit is sent before t...

Page 469: ...alogue trunk Value Range 1 15 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Dial Analogue CO Call Duration Start Specifies the length of time between the end of dialling and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing analogue trunk calls Value Range 0 60 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual...

Page 470: ... Answer Time Day Lunch Break Night Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing Recall Hold Recall Specifies the length of time until the holding extension receives a Hold Recall ring or alarm tone when a held call remains unretrieved Value Range 0 disable the Hold Recall 240 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 ...

Page 471: ...l hears a Call Park Recall ring Value Range 1 240 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 13 2 Call Park Recall Disconnect after Recall Specifies the length of time after an extension with a trunk call on hold receives a Hold Recall ton...

Page 472: ...usy Line Busy Party Features Tone Length Reorder Tone for PT Handset Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard when using a PT handset The PT will return to idle status when this timer expires Value Range 1 15 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 2 Automatic Extension Release Tone Length Reorder Tone ...

Page 473: ...e Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Mute OGM Start Timer after answering Specifies the length of time until the caller hears an OGM after reaching the DISA line Value Range 0 0 12 0 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual Referenc...

Page 474: ...pecifies the length of time in which the caller must dial the second digit before the DISA AA Service activates Value Range 0 5 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Intercept Timer Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the length of time until an unan...

Page 475: ...all rings at the intercept routing destination before being disconnected Value Range 0 60 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA CO to CO Call Prolong Counter Specifies the number of times that the caller can prolong a trunk to trunk call on a DIS...

Page 476: ...tem Access DISA DISA Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message Specifies the length of time that a progress tone is sent to the manager extension before recording an OGM Value Range 0 7 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Feature Guide References 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM DISA Reorder Tone Durati...

Page 477: ... Programming Manual References 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call Doorphone Call Duration Specifies the length of time until an answered doorphone call is disconnected Value Range 10 n n 0 30 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call Doorphone Open Duration Spec...

Page 478: ...ge 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 4 Timed Reminder Timed Reminder Interval Time Specifies the length of time between the repeated alarms Value Range 10 n n 1 120 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 4 Timed Reminder 478 PC Pr...

Page 479: ...Conference Recall tone Value Range 60 n n 0 60 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 14 1 2 Conference Unattended Conference Warning Tone Start Timer Specifies the length of time until the parties involved in an Unattended Conference receive a warning tone after the conference originator receives the Unattended Conferen...

Page 480: ...ces None Feature Guide References 1 14 1 2 Conference Miscellaneous Caller ID Waiting to receive Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive Caller ID from an analogue trunk If the Caller ID is received through an analogue trunk card on which no Caller ID card is mounted or through a port to which Caller ID Detection is disabled this timer is not applicable Value Range 0 15 s Mainte...

Page 481: ...ler ID Extension PIN Lock Counter Specifies the number of successive incorrect PIN entries allowed before the extension PIN is locked A locked extension PIN can not be used until reset from the extension assigned as manager Specifying None disables this counter Value Range None 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9...

Page 482: ...ocation 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Incoming Call Inter digit Timer TIE Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a dialled number from a TIE line The call will be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires Value Range 3 30 s Maintenance Co...

Page 483: ...fter air synchronisation is lost Value Range 0 300 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 5 29 3 11 Air Synchronisation Group 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Feature Guide References None Voice Mail Caller from VM to CO On hook Wait Time Specifies the length of time from when the VPS seizes a trunk for example to transfer a call until the VPS goes on hoo...

Page 484: ...al References None Feature Guide References None During Conversation DTMF Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of time between DTMF signals when numbers are dialled in succession from a PT or PS during a conversation Value Range 64 16 n n 0 15 ms Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None During Conversation Pause Signal ...

Page 485: ...y the cell station Value Range 0 s 4 s 8 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 4 18 2 9 System Options System Wireless Out of Range Registration Feature Guide References 1 30 6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group SVM Recording Time Specifies the maximum length of a message recorded by the SVM feature Value Range 1 600 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 ...

Page 486: ...implified Voice Message SVM Conference Group Call Ring Duration Specifies the length of time that a conference group call will ring The conference group call will be established with members who answer within this time If no members answer the call before this timer expires the call is cancelled Value Range 0 120 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References ...

Page 487: ...ime Table 1 Select the desired Time Table from the Time Table No list When in Automatic Switching mode the time modes of the tenant are switched as programmed in the corresponding Time Table Manual switching is possible only from an authorised extension determined by COS To adjust the currently displayed Time Table click and drag the divisions between two time periods To programme the time blocks ...

Page 488: ...rences None Feature Guide References 2 2 3 Tenant Service 2 2 4 Time Service 1 Day Lunch Night Day1 Start Lunch Start Day2 Start Night Start Hour Minute Specifies the start time for each time block Times can only be set when 1 Day Lunch Night Day1 Start Lunch Start Day2 Start Night Start Setting is set to Enable Value Range 00 00 23 59 Maintenance Console Location 4 7 2 4 Week Table Time Setting P...

Page 489: ...3 Start Setting is set to Enable Value Range 00 00 23 59 Maintenance Console Location 4 7 2 4 Week Table Time Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 3 Tenant Service 2 2 4 Time Service 2 Break Break 1 3 End Hour Minute Specifies the end time for each break period Times can only be set when 2 Break Break 1 3 Start Setting is set to Enable Value Range 00 00 23 59 Mai...

Page 490: ...Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 3 Tenant Service 2 2 4 Time Service 490 PC Programming Manual 4 7 2 4 Week Table Time Setting ...

Page 491: ... Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 5 Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Holiday Table Start Date Month Specifies the month of the holiday start date Value Range 1 12 Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 5 Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Holiday Table Start Date...

Page 492: ...ue Range 1 12 Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 5 Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Holiday Table End Date Day Specifies the day of the holiday end date Value Range 1 31 Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 5 Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service 492 PC Programming Manual 4 8 2 5 Holida...

Page 493: ...umbers and floating extension numbers Value Range Max 3 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings 5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings 7...

Page 494: ... Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM 8 6 6 6 Tenant Feature Guide References 2 2 5 Operator Features Idle Line Access Local Access Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call by Idle Line Access selects an idle trunk automatically Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manua...

Page 495: ...pecifies the feature number used to make a TIE line call Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Redial Specifies the feature number used to redial the last number dialled Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Conso...

Page 496: ... Dial Feature Guide References 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System Personal Speed Dialling Programming Specifies the feature number used to programme Personal Speed Dialling numbers at an extension Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal S...

Page 497: ...ramming Manual References 5 10 3 4 Paging Group Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging External BGM On Off Specifies the feature number available for manager extensions used to turn on or off the external BGM Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Se...

Page 498: ...le CO Line Access Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using a certain trunk Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access Parallel Telephone Ring Mode Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel an SL...

Page 499: ...l Pickup Directed Call Pickup Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain extension Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 3 Call Pickup Deny 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Call Pickup Deny Feature ...

Page 500: ...paging group Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 5 10 3 4 Paging Group Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging Automatic Callback Busy Cancel Specifies the feature number used to cancel Automatic Callback Busy Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbe...

Page 501: ...Remote Operation by Other Extension Feature Guide References 1 9 5 Walking COS 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Wireless XDP Parallel mode Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Setting...

Page 502: ...le Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 13 1 Call Hold Call Hold Retrieve Specified with a Holding Extension Number Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held call from a different extension by specifying a holding extension number Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numberin...

Page 503: ...a Held CO Line Number Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held trunk call from a different extension by specifying the held trunk number Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 13 1 Call Hold Door Open Specifies the feature number used to open a door Value Ran...

Page 504: ...ences 1 17 9 External Relay Control External Feature Access Specifies the feature number used to access the features of a host PBX or the telephone company Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 7 External Feature Access EFA ISDN Hold Specifies the feature number used...

Page 505: ...IR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E E911 3PTY Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Ident...

Page 506: ...n to the network Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port ISDN CO Subscriber Number 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port CO Setting Subscriber Number 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings ISDN CLIP CLIP ID 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings ISDN CLI...

Page 507: ...g Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 4 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP 1 21 1 5 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P Message Waiting Set Cancel Call Back Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Message Waiting or call back the caller Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None ...

Page 508: ...ng Plan Main Programming Manual References 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND FWD DND Set Cancel Call from Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD DND for incoming intercom calls Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbe...

Page 509: ...ntercom calls to an incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 1 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY Group FWD Set Cancel...

Page 510: ... 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 1 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY Call Pickup Deny Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Call Pickup Deny i e preventing other extensions from picking up call...

Page 511: ...used to use the same extension settings at a new extension Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 3 Walking Extension Features Data Line Security Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Data Line Security i e preventing signals from other extensi...

Page 512: ... 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting Automatic Call Waiting Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Call Waiting notification from a trunk doorphone or a call via an incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting Executive Overri...

Page 513: ...sed to enter or leave Not Ready mode Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out Log in Log out Specifies the feature number used to join or leave an incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 4 ...

Page 514: ...mber Feature Guide References 1 2 2 8 Supervisory Feature Hot Line Pickup Dial Program Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set cancel the Hot Line feature or programme the number to be automatically dialled Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone...

Page 515: ...Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM Feature Guide References 1 17 4 Background Music BGM Remote Timed Reminder Remote Wakeup Call Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder remotely Wake up Call Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming ...

Page 516: ...s consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Main SMDR for External Hotel Application 2 Printing Message 1 8 Feature Guide References 1 26 2 Printing Message Extension Dial Lock Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to lock or unlock an extension to make certain trunk calls and change the forwarding des...

Page 517: ...ng Manager Manager Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Remote Extension Dial Lock Off Specifies the feature number available for manager extensions used to unlock other extensions using the Extension Dial Lock feature Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settin...

Page 518: ...n features of an extension to the default values Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 2 Extension Feature Clear Extension PIN Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set a PIN for an extension Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Consol...

Page 519: ...ature number used to make a conference group call Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Miscellaneous Conference Group Call Ring Duration 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Miscellaneous Conference Group Call Operation 5 27 3 10 Conference Group Feature Guide References 1...

Page 520: ...es 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 5 Busy Out Busy Out for Analogue CO Feature Guide References 1 5 4 6 Trunk Busy Out Simplified Voice Message Access Specifies the feature number used to access the SVM feature to record listen to and delete messages Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 6 9 4 1 7 Wire...

Page 521: ... 1 TIE Table Leading Number Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service KX T7710 The settings of the MESSAGE button and One touch buttons on the KX T7710 can be programmed Dial Indicates the DTMF tone dial required by the PBX to recognise it and dial the preprogrammed number for each button reference only Value Range B For MESSAGE button A1 For One touch button 1 A2 For One touch button 2 A3 ...

Page 522: ...tenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Message Waiting Set Cancel Call Back Feature Guide References 1 6 1 3 KX T7710 One touch Dialling One touch Dial 01 08 Phone Number Specifies the number dialled when a one touch button on the KX T7710 is pressed This is available only when the position of the Mode switch leve...

Page 523: ...hen TIE line does not work Specifies whether to check if the quick dial numbering plan is compatible does not overlap with the main numbering plan Value Range Disable Checks whether the quick dial numbering plan is compatible with the main numbering plan Enable Does not check whether the quick dial numbering plan is compatible with the main numbering plan Maintenance Console Location 4 10 2 6 2 Nu...

Page 524: ...uick Dialling number is used Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 4 10 2 6 2 Numbering Plan Quick Dial Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 6 Quick Dialling 1 30 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering 524 PC Programming Manual 4 10 2 6 2 Numbering Pla...

Page 525: ...Waiting for Extension Call 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 2 Manual C Waiting for Extension Call Feature Guide References 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND 1 8 4 2 Call Waiting Tone 1 8 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA Executive Busy Override Specifies the feature number used to interrupt an existing call to establish a three party confer...

Page 526: ...Message Waiting Set Specifies the feature number used to leave a Message Waiting notification Value Range 1 digit 0 9 or Maintenance Console Location 4 11 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 1 Message Waiting Call Monitor Specifies the feature number used to listen to a busy extension s conversation Value Range 1 digit 0 9 or ...

Page 527: ...A DND Override 2 Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting or call an extension in DND mode This is the same setting as BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override on this screen and can be used to provide two methods of activating the specified features This can be useful for example if users prefer to use a separate feature number to activate DND Overri...

Page 528: ...1 8 4 2 Call Waiting Tone 1 8 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA 528 PC Programming Manual 4 11 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature ...

Page 529: ...f Service COS TRS Level Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring level for making trunk calls in each time mode Value Range 1 Allows all trunk calls 2 6 Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables 7 Restricts all trunk calls Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual Re...

Page 530: ...Code Feature Guide References 1 9 3 Extension Dial Lock TRS Level for System Speed Dialling Specifies the TRS Barring level for making a trunk call using System Speed Dialling numbers which overrides the TRS Barring set for the current time mode Value Range 1 Allows all trunk calls 2 6 Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables 7 Restricts all trunk ...

Page 531: ... CO Duration Time 60s on 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 2 Extension CO Call Limitation For Incoming Call 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Main COS 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extensi...

Page 532: ...1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Account Code Mode Specifies whether the entry of an account code is optional or mandatory when making a trunk call Value Range Option Forced Maintenance Console Location...

Page 533: ...CF by ISDN P P Outgoing CO Call Printout SMDR Enables the automatic recording of information about outgoing trunk calls on SMDR Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS 13 1 11 1 Main Feature Guide Refere...

Page 534: ...nge Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide References 1 8 2 Executive Busy Override DND Override Enables making a call to an extension in DND mode by entering the feature number Value Range Disable En...

Page 535: ...gramming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide References 1 8 4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 1 8 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA Call Monitor Enables listening to a busy extension s conversation Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2...

Page 536: ...ttings Main COS 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Programming Manager COS Name Specifies the name of the COS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Executive Busy Override Deny...

Page 537: ...of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 5 14 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Member List 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Programming Mode Level Specifies the level of authorisation for performing PT programming Value Range Disable A ...

Page 538: ...itching of time modes Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 4 6 2 4 Week Table 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service PDN SDN An SDN button allows a PT user to see the current status of the corres...

Page 539: ...d Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Making call by COS of SDN key s owner Selects whether an extension that uses an SDN button to make calls is given the COS of the SDN button s registered owner extension This setting is only av...

Page 540: ... Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Optional Device Other Extensions COS Name Specifies the name of the COS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References None Featur...

Page 541: ...ce Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 7 6 5 4 External Relay Feature Guide References 1 17 9 External Relay Control Accept the Call from DISA Enables reception of calls from DISA Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Setti...

Page 542: ... COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide References 1 9 5 Walking COS Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS Allows Wireless XDP Parallel Mode to be set by a PS Value Range Allow Deny Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide Reference...

Page 543: ...Manual References 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Miscellaneous Conference Group Call Ring Duration 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Conference Group Call Operation 5 27 3 10 Conference Group Feature Guide References 1 15 1 Conference Group Call Accept a collect call for Brazil Enables accepting collect calls Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Set...

Page 544: ...E200 or 1 96 KX TDE600 Specifies the available trunk groups Value Range Block blue Non Block Maintenance Console Location 4 13 2 7 2 Class of Service External Call Block Programming Manual References 4 6 2 4 Week Table 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access 544 PC Programmi...

Page 545: ...ther Extension 1 64 Specifies the combinations of COS levels for which intercom calls are blocked Value Range Block blue Non Block Maintenance Console Location 4 14 2 7 3 Class of Service Internal Call Block Programming Manual References 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Main COS 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Se...

Page 546: ...fies the ring tone pattern for incoming trunk calls Value Range Single Double Triple Option1 Option2 Maintenance Console Location 4 15 2 8 1 Ring Tone Patterns Call from CO Programming Manual References 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Trunk Group Number 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table Fea...

Page 547: ...the ring tone pattern for incoming doorphone calls Value Range Single Double Triple S Double Option 1 Option 2 Maintenance Console Location 4 16 2 8 2 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Doorphone Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Feature Guide ...

Page 548: ...all from Others Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table Feature Guide References None Timed Reminder Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 Specifies the ring tone pattern for Timed Reminder alarms Value Range Single Double Triple Option 1 Option 2 Maintenance Console Locat...

Page 549: ...8 3 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Others Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table Feature Guide References None External Sensor Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 Specifies the ring tone pattern for calls from an external sensor Value Range Single Double Triple Option 1 O...

Page 550: ...Feature Guide References None 550 PC Programming Manual 4 17 2 8 3 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Others ...

Page 551: ...splay Selects the time format shown on the displays of extensions The time display format assigned here applies when setting the Timed Reminder feature Value Range 12H 24H Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 4 Timed Reminder PT LCD Password PIN Display Selects whether passwords and PINs Personal Identification Number...

Page 552: ... Options Programming Manual References 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 20 3 LED Indication PT Fwd DND DND LED Selects the light pattern of the FWD DND button while the DND feature is activated Value Range On Solid Red on Flash Slow red flashing Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 ...

Page 553: ... When there are separate FWD DND settings for calls from trunks and calls from extensions mode switching cannot be performed Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features PT Fwd DND Paging to DND Extension Specifies ...

Page 554: ...mming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 2 Off hook Monitor PT Operation Privacy Release by SCO key Selects the function of the S CO button during a trunk call Value Range Enable Pressing the S CO button activates the Privacy Release feature Disable Pressing the S CO button switches the information shown on the PT display Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Progr...

Page 555: ...ation Automatic Answer for Call from CO after Specifies the number of times a PT in Hands free Answerback mode will ring before a conversation is established automatically when it receives a call from a trunk Value Range No Ring 1 Ring 2 Rings 3 Rings Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback PT Op...

Page 556: ...all Transfer without Announcement feature Value Range Hold Any extension can retrieve a held call Exclusive Hold Only the holding extension can retrieve a held call Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 13 1 Call Hold Option 2 Extension Clear Call Waiting Specifies whether the Call Waiting setting is cleared when Extensio...

Page 557: ... References None Feature Guide References 1 28 2 Extension Feature Clear Extension Clear Hot Line Pickup Dial Specifies whether the Hot Line setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed Value Range Clear Do not clear Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 2 Extension Feature Clear CODEC System CODEC Sele...

Page 558: ...c mode Specifies whether to automatically send as an end code when dialling to an ISDN line if used as the end code will not be dialled out as part of a number even when the key is pressed Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port ISDN CO ISDN Outgoing Call Type 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI ...

Page 559: ...nalogue CO line is performed when the called party does not answer within a preprogrammed time period Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Automatic Redial Redial Call Ring Duration Feature Guide References 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Redial Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory Specifies whether ...

Page 560: ...g Call Selects whether the time limit for extension to trunk calls applies to outgoing calls only or for both outgoing and incoming calls COS determines the use of this feature and the length of the time limit can be assigned on a trunk group basis Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings ...

Page 561: ...nfirmation Tone 2 is heard from a PT when it receives a call in Hands free Answerback mode or paging Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback 1 16 1 Paging 1 29 2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone Tone 3 1 Start Talking after Making Call Call from Doorphone Enables the...

Page 562: ... Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 29 2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone Tone 4 1 Start Conference Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4 1 Confirmation Tone 4 1 is heard from an extension when a new party joins a conference call Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 S...

Page 563: ...firmation Tone Tone 5 Hold Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 5 Confirmation Tone 5 is heard from an extension when it holds a call Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 29 2 Confirmation Tone Dial Tone Distinctive Dial Tone Enables the PBX to send dial tones at different frequencies depe...

Page 564: ...de References 1 29 1 Dial Tone Dial Tone Dial Tone for ARS Selects the dial tone the PBX instead of the network sends to the caller when a call is made using the ARS feature or ISDN En Bloc dialling Value Range Type A Type B Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port 10 1 8 1 System Se...

Page 565: ...use of the ECHO EECHO card for trunk to trunk calls Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Echo Cancel Extension to Analogue Line Enables the use of the ECHO EECHO card for extension to analogue trunk calls Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Program...

Page 566: ...e References None Option 4 DSS Key DSS key mode for Incoming Call Enables the use of a DSS button to pick up an incoming call to another extension or an ICD group Value Range ON or Flash OFF Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup 1 20 3 LED Indication DSS Key Call Pick up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Ca...

Page 567: ... Value Range Disable The DSS button will light up when a call arrives but pressing it will not pick up the call Enable The DSS button will flash when a call arrives and pressing it will pick up the call Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup DSS Key Automatic Transfer for Extension Call Specifies whether ...

Page 568: ...od specified in Recall Transfer Recall in 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Recall Transfer Recall Feature Guide References 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature 1 12 1 Call Transfer Transfer Automatic Answer for Transferred Call Enables transferred calls including direct extension calls to be automatically answered...

Page 569: ...LIP number of the calling party or the CLIP number of the forwarding extension or virtual PS is sent to the forwarding destination to identify the origin of a trunk call Value Range Disable The CLIP number assigned to the forwarding extension or virtual PS is sent Enable The CLIP number of the calling party is sent Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References ...

Page 570: ...sions at each PBX Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Leading Number Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service System Wireless Out of Range Registration Selects whether the PBX can set the status of a PS to Out of Range if no signal is received from the PS for a preset length of time This feature mu...

Page 571: ...Guide References 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Option 5 SLT SLT Hold Mode Selects how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT For details of each mode see 1 13 1 Call Hold in the Feature Guide Value Range Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1...

Page 572: ...References 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA Call Waiting Automatic Call Waiting for Extension Call Selects whether Busy Station Signalling BSS is automatically performed when an extension user calls a busy extension Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting Busy Out Busy Out for Analogue CO E...

Page 573: ...ephone company Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PT Feature Access No 1 8 Specifies the System Feature Access Menu 1 8 shown on the display of an extension Value Range None Call Back Cancel Call Pickup Direct Call Pickup Group Doorphone Call Door Open Relay On External BGM Paging Maintena...

Page 574: ...up to 8 people can speak at the start of a conference group call Value Range Disable The original caller and up to 7 participants can speak at the start of a conference group call Enable Only the original caller can speak at the start of a conference group call Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References 5 27 3 10 Conference Group Feature Guide References 1 1...

Page 575: ...out success the PBX assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost Value Range 0 10 Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI 3rd Party CTI System status retry interval timer Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no respo...

Page 576: ...ferences 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI 3rd Party CTI CDR retry interval timer Specifies the length of time until the alive check of CDR is retried when no response is received for Third Party Call Control CTI Value Range 0 60 s Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI 3rd P...

Page 577: ...ntenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CTI Multi PBX Control USB Serial Number Specifies the serial number assigned to this PBX s USB data transfers used when multiple PBXs are connected via USB to one PC for example for CTI Value Range 1 8 Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References ...

Page 578: ... an SLT when a call is made from CTI instead of the SLT Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 578 PC Programming Manual 4 18 2 9 System Options ...

Page 579: ...al References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Channel Seizure Signal Bits Specifies the number of seizure bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT Value Range 10 n n 3 40 bits Maintenance Console Location 4 19 2 10 Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Mark Signal Bits Specifies the number of mark bits to...

Page 580: ... an SLT Value Range 64 n n 5 35 ms Maintenance Console Location 4 19 2 10 Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Signal Type Specifies the type of signal modulation to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT reference only Value Range FSK Maintenance Console Location 4 19 2 10 Extension CID Settings Programming Man...

Page 581: ...r ID Send Caller ID Date Time to Extension Enables the PBX to send the date and time of an incoming call when sending Caller ID information to an SLT Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 19 2 10 Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Send Caller ID Name to Extension Enables the PBX to send the caller s name when send...

Page 582: ... Maintenance Console Location 4 19 2 10 Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID FSK Transmission Level Specifies the transmission level for FSK signal modulation Value Range 14 dB 12 dB 10 dB 8 dB 6 dB 4 dB 2 dB 0 dB Maintenance Console Location 4 19 2 10 Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1...

Page 583: ... Group Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging Paging EPG 2 External Pager 2 Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 2 Value Range 15 15 dB Maintenance Console Location 4 20 2 11 1 Audio Gain Paging MOH Programming Manual References 5 10 3 4 Paging Group Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging Paging Paging Level from PT Speaker Specifies the volume when paging is broadcast through the s...

Page 584: ... Audio Gain Paging MOH Programming Manual References 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM Feature Guide References 1 13 4 Music on Hold 1 17 4 Background Music BGM MOH MOH 2 Music On Hold 2 Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 2 Value Range 11 11 dB Maintenance Console Location 4 20 2 11 1 Audio Gain Paging MOH Programming Manual References 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM Feature Guide References 1 13 4 Music on...

Page 585: ...e Console Location 4 21 2 11 2 Audio Gain Card Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Down Gain From PBX Specifies the volume for audio signals from the PBX to the selected type of card Value Range 15 15 dB Maintenance Console Location 4 21 2 11 2 Audio Gain Card Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 585 4 21 2 11 2 Audio G...

Page 586: ...586 PC Programming Manual 4 21 2 11 2 Audio Gain Card ...

Page 587: ...Section 5 3 Group PC Programming Manual 587 ...

Page 588: ...oup TRG Settings Programming Manual References 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References None COS Specifies the COS of the trunk group applied when making a call from a trunk to another trunk with TIE Line Service If you wish to prevent such calls from being made ensure that the COS specified here has a TRS level of 7 assigned for all relevant time modes in 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service CO...

Page 589: ...CO Duration Time 60s Specifies the length of time that a trunk to trunk call can be maintained before being disconnected Value Range None 60 n n 1 60 s Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 11 8 Trunk Call Limitation Extension CO Duration Time 60s Specifies the length of time that an exten...

Page 590: ...e 1 4 Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 5 3 3 1 3 Caller ID Modification 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Dialling Plan Table Specifies the table to be used for en bloc dialling Value Range 1 4 Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 5 4 3 1 4 Dialli...

Page 591: ...unk call by silence detection Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Tone Detection Continuous Enables the disconnection of a DISA originated trunk to trunk call by continuous signal de...

Page 592: ...m 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection Silence Enables the disconnection of an SVM originated trunk to trunk call by silence detection Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 7 Built in Sim...

Page 593: ... signal detection Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Host PBX Access Code Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Setti...

Page 594: ...ss Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX Collect Call Reject For Brazil Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References None Collect Call Reject for Brazil Mode Enables the PBX to automatic...

Page 595: ...0 ms 2000 ms Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Collect Call Reject for Brazil Flashing Time Selects the length of the flash signal that the PBX sends to reject a collect call This setting is only for users in Brazil Value Range 1000 ms 1500 ms 2000 ms 2500 ms Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk ...

Page 596: ...ies the trunk group assigned to the corresponding priority level Select the blank option to not assign a trunk group to the priority Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 Trunk Group No 1 64 For KX TDE600 Trunk Group No 1 96 Maintenance Console Location 5 2 3 1 2 Trunk Group Local Access Priority Programming Manual References 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access 5...

Page 597: ...ional call data and 1 long distance code can be programmed Each trunk group can select a table for use Select the desired table from the Modification Table list If the modified number does not contain an area code programmed here the PBX applies the Long Distance Code settings to the modified number Area Code for Local International Call Data 1 10 Specifies the leading number area code to look for...

Page 598: ...e type of network numbering plan is Unknown or not specified A maximum of 4 Length of Digits Modification Tables can be programmed Select the desired table from the Modification Table list If the length of digits of an incoming trunk call is less than the Minimum Caller ID Digits for National the caller s number is not modified Minimum Caller ID Digits for International Specifies the minimum numbe...

Page 599: ...dded Number for International Specifies the number to be added to the incoming telephone number when the total number of digits exceeds Minimum Caller ID Digits for International Value Range Max 8 digits 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 5 3 3 1 3 Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Calling Party number Type of Number Public Private 3 35 1 1...

Page 600: ...sed for sending to the network as a CLIP number A maximum of 4 CLIP Modification Tables can be programmed Select the desired table from the Modification Table list Removed Number of Digits Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming caller s number for each type of network numbering plan Value Range 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 3 3 1 3 Caller ID Modification Progra...

Page 601: ...on Programming Manual References 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Calling Party Number Type of Number Public Private 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Called Party Number Type of Number Public Private Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID PC Programming Manual 601 5 3 3 1 3 Caller ID Modification ...

Page 602: ...st To assign a set of leading numbers automatically click Auto Assign Leading Number Specifies the leading number to be regarded as the beginning of dialling Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 N 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P 0 1 and X 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 5 4 3 1 4 Dialling Plan Programming Manual References 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Analogue CO First Digit 4 ...

Page 603: ...place of the removed digits Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 5 4 3 1 4 Dialling Plan Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY PC Programming Manual 603 5 4 3 1 4 Dialling Plan ...

Page 604: ...lling plan table Value Range Type A 1 N11 2 NXX XXXX 3 1NXX NXX XXXX 4 50 Not stored Type B 1 N11 2 NNX XXXX 3 1NPX NXX XXXX 4 50 Not stored Type C 1 N11 2 NXX XXXX 3 1NNX XXXX 4 1NPX NXX XXXX 5 50 Not stored Type D 1 47 Not stored 48 N11 49 NXX XXXX 50 1NXX NXX XXXX Type E 1 N11 2 NXX NXX XXXX 3 1NXX NXX XXXX 4 50 Not stored Maintenance Console Location 5 5 3 1 4 Dialling Plan Auto Assign Program...

Page 605: ...te Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Rate Specifies the call charge rate The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options Digits After Decimal Point in 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Value Range 0 9999999 Maintenance Console Location 5 6 3 1 5 Trunk Group Charge Rate Programming Manual References 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Feature Gu...

Page 606: ...amming Manual References 5 8 3 3 Call Pickup Group 5 10 3 4 Paging Group 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main User Group 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main User Group Feature Guide References 2 2 2 Group Tenant Number Specifies the tenant to which the extension user group belongs Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 8 For KX TDE600 1 32 Maintenance Console Location 5...

Page 607: ...ng Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup 2 2 2 Group Pickup Group 1st 8th Selects the call pickup groups that the extension user group belongs to One extension user group can be assigned to a maximum of 8 call pickup groups on this screen To assign an extension user group to more th...

Page 608: ...Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup 2 2 2 Group 608 PC Programming Manual 5 8 3 3 Call Pickup Group ...

Page 609: ... Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup 2 2 2 Group User Group 1 32 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 or 1 96 KX TDE600 Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding pickup group Value Range ON blue OFF Maintenance Console Location 5 9 3 3 Call Pickup Group All Setting Programming Manual References 6 1 4 ...

Page 610: ...haracters Maintenance Console Location 5 10 3 4 Paging Group Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging 2 2 2 Group Paging Group 1st 8th Selects the paging groups that the extension user group belongs to One extension user group can be assigned to a maximum of 8 paging groups on th...

Page 611: ...Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging 2 2 2 Group PC Programming Manual 611 5 10 3 4 Paging Group ...

Page 612: ...ed Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging 2 2 2 Group User Group 1 32 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 or 1 96 KX TDE600 Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding paging group Value Range ON blue OFF white Maintenance Console Location 5 11 3 4 Paging Group All Setting Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 ...

Page 613: ...n Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging 2 2 2 Group External Pager 1 Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the corresponding paging group Value Range ON blue OFF Maintenance Console Location 5 12 3 4 Paging Group External Pager Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide Refere...

Page 614: ... External Pager Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging 2 2 2 Group 614 PC Programming Manual 5 12 3 4 Paging Group External Pager ...

Page 615: ...ncoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY in the Feature Guide Main Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group Name Specifies th...

Page 616: ... of the incoming call distribution group Value Range All Distribution Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution FWD Mode Specifies whether extensions in FWD mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group Value Range No Ring Ring Mainte...

Page 617: ...erences 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution Tenant Number Specifies the tenant to which the incoming call distribution group belongs to determine the Time Table and the audio source for the group The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 8 For KX TDE600 1 32 Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Progra...

Page 618: ...k 4 14 2 7 3 Class of Service Internal Call Block Feature Guide References 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block CLIP on ICD Group Button Specifies the CLIP number sent to the network when making calls using the ICD Group button Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Gu...

Page 619: ...tings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Queuing Busy Destination Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the overflow destination of calls that cannot be queued in each time mode Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References 4 6 2 4 Week Tabl...

Page 620: ...the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 13 ...

Page 621: ...oup Group Settings Programming Manual References 4 6 2 4 Week Table Feature Guide References 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature 1 2 2 6 Overflow Feature Time out Manual Queue Redirection Overflow Time Specifies the length of time calls wait in a queue before they are redirected to the overflow destination Value Range None 10 n n 1 125 s Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group...

Page 622: ...ing Feature Queuing Time Table Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution gro...

Page 623: ...l References 4 6 2 4 Week Table Feature Guide References 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature Queuing Time Table When Extension Ringing Enables the PBX to play messages BGM to the caller according to the Queuing Time Table when the call arrives at an extension without being queued or after being queued Value Range Disable Ringback Tone Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution G...

Page 624: ...haracters Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension No Answer Redirection Time Specifies the length of time that a call queues at an extension before it is redirected to the next member extension of the incoming call distribution group in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution met...

Page 625: ...anual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out Maximum No of Busy Extension Specifies the number of extensions that can accept calls simultaneously in the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max Call arrives at an idle extension 1 32 Call will not arrive at an idle extension when the number of busy extensions exceeds the assigned number Maintenance Console Location ...

Page 626: ...ble Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 5 VIP Call Supervisor Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the incoming call distribution group s supervisor The supervisor can monitor and control the status of each member of the group using a 6 line display PT The supe...

Page 627: ...ings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Group Log Group FWD Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature ...

Page 628: ...emory Value Range 0 100 Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Incoming Call Log Group FWD Call from CO Setting Indicates the current FWD status for incoming trunk calls reference only Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group S...

Page 629: ...Setting Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls reference only Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Group FWD Call from Extension Destination Specifies the forward destination of incoming intercom calls directed to the in...

Page 630: ...Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 630 PC Programming Manual 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings ...

Page 631: ...er Setting To copy the members to another group click Member list copy select the group and click OK Extension Number Specifies the extension number of each member In addition to the extension numbers of PT SLT PS and T1 OPX extensions floating extension numbers of PS Ring groups can also be specified Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 14 3 5 1 Incoming Call ...

Page 632: ...ension can accept another call This timer is used when Options Wrap up Timer based on is set to ICD Group Member in 5 16 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Value Range 10 n n 0 300 s Maintenance Console Location 5 14 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Member List Programming Manual References 5 16 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Options Wra...

Page 633: ...w destination when there is no answer Disconnect Disconnects the line Sequence 01 16 Redirects the call to a different sequence Wait 5 n n 1 16 s If preceded by an OGM plays the Music on Hold for the specified period of time if not preceded by an OGM sends a ringback tone for the specified period of time OGM 01 64 Sends a certain OGM Maintenance Console Location 5 15 3 5 2 Incoming Call Distributi...

Page 634: ...Enhanced Phantom button mode When set to Enhanced Phantom mode creating an ICD Group button at an extension using PT personal programming automatically registers the extension as a member of the relevant ICD Group The extension user can also specify the delayed ringing settings Value Range Group DN Enhanced Phantom Maintenance Console Location 5 16 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellane...

Page 635: ...ngs and 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings become unavailable Value Range Extension The timer is activated after all calls to or from the extension including a retrieved call on hold ICD Group Member The timer is only activated after calls to the extension through an ICD Group Maintenance Console Location 5 16 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Programming Manual Refe...

Page 636: ...the group click Member List To assign extensions as overflow destinations easily click Destination Setting see 2 1 6 Extension Number Setting Hunting Group Name Specifies the name of the hunting group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 17 3 6 Extension Hunting Group Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting Hunting Type Speci...

Page 637: ...me mode Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 5 17 3 6 Extension Hunting Group Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting PC Programming Manual 637 5 17 3 6 Extension Hunting Group ...

Page 638: ...g of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 18 3 6 Extension Hunting Group Member List Programming Manual References 5 17 3 6 Extension Hunting Group Feature Guide References 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension when an extension number is specified in Extension Number above reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 18 3 6 Ex...

Page 639: ... 4 Queuing Feature 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group Intercept to Mailbox Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the VPS when a call is redirected to the VM DPT group by Intercept Routing When the VPS receives the mailbox number the VPS answers the call with the appropriate mailbox Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 19 3 7 1 VM DPT Group System Settin...

Page 640: ...answered within a programmed time period 2 when the VPS is assigned as the Transfer Recall destination of a certain extension When the VPS receives the mailbox number the VPS answers the call with the appropriate mailbox Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 19 3 7 1 VM DPT Group System Settings Programming Manual References 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Gu...

Page 641: ...tion 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Programming Manual References 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide References 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Group Name Specifies the name of the VM DPT group which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM DPT group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 20 ...

Page 642: ...sole Location 5 21 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type Type 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 5 21 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type Type 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Se...

Page 643: ...reference only Value Range 1 12 Maintenance Console Location 5 21 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type Type 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Feature Guide References 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group Extension No Indicates the extension number assigned to the VM port reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location ...

Page 644: ...nsion Name Indicates the name of the extension reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 21 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type Type 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Feature Guide References 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 644 PC Programming Manual 5 21 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Uni...

Page 645: ...led extension is ringing Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and P pause Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Status Signal Busy Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is busy Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and P pause Mainte...

Page 646: ...intenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Status Signal Answer Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension has answered the call Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and P pause Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Program...

Page 647: ...s signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the caller hangs up Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and P pause Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Status Signal FWD to VM Ringback Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the VPS and...

Page 648: ...FWD to Extension Ringback Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to another extension and the PBX is calling the destination extension Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and P pause Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Command Re...

Page 649: ...ut having to dial the mailbox number manually Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 H mailbox number and P pause Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 1 Message Waiting VM DTMF Command Switching to AA Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from VM Service Mode to AA Service...

Page 650: ...Feature Guide References None Timing DTMF Length for VM Specifies the length of DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS Value Range 80 ms 160 ms Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Timing Inter digit Time Specifies the length of pause time between DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS Value Range 80 ms...

Page 651: ...ences None Timing Waiting Time before Sending VM DTMF Status Signal Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the DTMF status signal to the VPS after the VPS has finished dialling Value Range 0 5 s 1 0 s 1 5 s 2 0 s Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Others Call Waiting on VM Gr...

Page 652: ...o the VPS Value Range None Answer by Mailbox AA Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Others Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is intercepted to the VPS so that the VPS can answer the call either with a mailbox or in the AA ser...

Page 653: ... Group Group Settings Miscellaneous Programmed Mailbox No 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Programmed Mailbox No 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Programmed Mailbox No Feature Guide References None Others Message Waiting Lamp Control Specifies whether the PBX or VPS cancels the Message Waiting feature e g turning off the MESSAGE button light when an exte...

Page 654: ...Maintenance Console Location 5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group Group Name Specifies the name of the VM DTMF group which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM DTMF group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Programming Manua...

Page 655: ...nsole Location 5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration PC Programming Manual 655 5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings ...

Page 656: ...e VPS Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 24 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Member List Programming Manual References 5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 1 24 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 24 3 8 2 VM D...

Page 657: ...p Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 25 2 PS Ring Group Group Name Specifies the name of the PS ring group which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the PS ring group when Incoming Trunk Call Information Display on this screen is set to Called Number Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 25 3 9 PS Ring Group Programming Manual Refe...

Page 658: ...nge Caller ID Called Number Maintenance Console Location 5 25 3 9 PS Ring Group Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 25 2 PS Ring Group 658 PC Programming Manual 5 25 3 9 PS Ring Group ...

Page 659: ... extension number of the PS assigned to the PS Ring Group Value Range Max 5 digits Maintenance Console Location 5 26 3 9 PS Ring Group Member List Programming Manual References 5 25 3 9 PS Ring Group 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 25 2 PS Ring Group Extension Name Indicates the name of the PS reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Consol...

Page 660: ...ember List When Conference Group Call Broadcast Mode in 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 5 is set to Disable only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group All of these members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts Conference Group Name Specifies the name of the conference group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 27 3 10 Conference Group Programming Manua...

Page 661: ...tination number of each member of the conference group Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 5 28 3 10 Conference Group Member List Programming Manual References 5 27 3 10 Conference Group Feature Guide References 1 15 1 Conference Group Call Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension when an extension number is specified in Dial Number...

Page 662: ...e only Value Range 1 Maintenance Console Location 5 29 3 11 Air Synchronisation Group Programming Manual References 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Feature Guide References None Group Name Specifies a name for the Air Synchronisation Group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 29 3 11 Air Synchronisation Group Programming Manual References 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Feature...

Page 663: ...Section 6 4 Extension PC Programming Manual 663 ...

Page 664: ...nd flexible button settings To assign a set of CLIP numbers automatically click CLIP Generate Main Shelf Indicates the shelf type and or position reference only Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 Physical Virtual For KX TDE600 Shelf number Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicat...

Page 665: ...s the extension number of the extension Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 W...

Page 666: ...enance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 1 1 Extension Port Configuration Telephone Type Indicates the type of telephone connected to the extension port reference only Value Range DPT 15V DPT 40V DPT is connected APT 15V APT is connected DSS DSS Console is connected VM VPS is connected SLT SLT is connected or...

Page 667: ...the extension belongs Extension user groups are used to compose tenants call pickup groups and paging groups Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 32 For KX TDE600 1 96 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 2 Group 2 2 3 Tenant Service COS Specifies the COS of the extension Value Range 1 64 Maintena...

Page 668: ...e strongly recommend a Keeping PINs secret b Selecting complex random PINs that cannot be easily guessed c Changing PINs frequently Value Range Max 10 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN Intercept Destination Shelf Indicates ...

Page 669: ...es None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 PC Prog...

Page 670: ... called party does not answer Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing No Answer and Intercept Routing DND Note that Intercept Routing Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination When Called Party is Busy below Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired E...

Page 671: ...Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing Intercept No Answer Time Shelf Indicates the shelf type and or position reference only Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 Physical Virtual For KX TDE600 Shelf number Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicat...

Page 672: ...d Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection ...

Page 673: ...call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode When this setting is set to 0 the system timer is used Value Range 0 240 s Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA Day Lunch Break Night Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Rou...

Page 674: ...ates the slot position of each extension card reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 674 PC Programming Manual 6 1 4 ...

Page 675: ...3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CLIP ID Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party...

Page 676: ... Slot Port Property PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port ISDN CO Subscriber Number 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port CO Setting Subscriber Number 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings ISDN CLIP CLIP ID Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Pre...

Page 677: ...1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Option 1 Shelf Indicates the shelf type and or position reference only Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 Physical Virtual For KX TDE600 Shelf number Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings ...

Page 678: ...tenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 25 1 1 Slot P...

Page 679: ...ned off once and then turned on after assigning this setting When changing the port type of an extension port in DPT Type Type on the 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port screen the Wireless XDP setting must be deleted first Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Ref...

Page 680: ... 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Transfer Recall Destination Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain ti...

Page 681: ...e References 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Option 2 Shelf Indicates the shelf type and or position reference only Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 Physical Virtual For KX TDE600 Shelf number Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slo...

Page 682: ...ettings Programming Manual References 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Feature Guide R...

Page 683: ...er OHCA Voice from the built in speaker W OHCA Voice from the handset Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting 1 8 4 1 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension SUMMARY Automatic C Waiting Specifies whether to receive call waiting notifications for calls from a trunk doorphone calls a...

Page 684: ...A Recall Tone Dial Hot Line Pickup Dial Start Feature Guide References 1 6 1 7 Hot Line Pickup Dial No Specifies the number to be dialled automatically after going off hook when the Hot Line feature is active Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None ...

Page 685: ...ange For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 Physical Virtual For KX TDE600 Shelf number Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings PC Programm...

Page 686: ...rt Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension Value Range ...

Page 687: ...ation 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Executive Override Deny Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions Value Range Disable Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call Enable Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call Maintenance Console Location 6...

Page 688: ...at can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options Digits After Decimal Point in 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Value Range 0 9999999 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Feature Guide References 1 9 2 Budget Management Intercom Call by Voice Selects the method of receiving intercom calls When Deny Voice...

Page 689: ...enance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 68...

Page 690: ...ension Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings...

Page 691: ...coming Preferred Line Selects the line on which an incoming call is answered after going off hook Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will be answered when going off hook Value Range No Line No line is selected Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call Ringing Line The longest ringing call is sel...

Page 692: ...at was being monitored Value Range Stop Record Keep Record Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration LCS Answer Mode Specifies whether the extension s mailbox is monitored in Hands free or Private mode Value Range Hands free Monitor through the built in speaker Priv...

Page 693: ...helf number Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References None...

Page 694: ...ension Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings...

Page 695: ...irst line of the extension s display Value Range Caller ID Name CO Line Name DDI DID Name Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 20 4 Display Information Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call Va...

Page 696: ...an incoming trunk call automatically after a certain number of rings without going off hook when Hands free Answerback has been set on the extension This setting is only effective when Forced Automatic Answer on this screen has been set to Off Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Refere...

Page 697: ... the slot position of each extension card reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings PC Programming Manual 697 6 ...

Page 698: ...nsion Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Forced Automatic Answer Specifies whether the extension automatically answers all incoming calls both intercom and trunk...

Page 699: ... 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ICM Tone Selects the ring tone for incoming calls arriving at the INTERCOM button or PDN buttons Note that the ring tone specified here is applied to all PDN buttons on an extension Value Range KX DT300 series except KX DT321 KX T7600 series except KX T7665 IP PT except KX NT265 KX NT321 1 ...

Page 700: ...sion Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Incoming Call Log 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Paging Deny Specifies whether paging of the extension from other extensions is enabled Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Reference...

Page 701: ... the slot position of each extension card reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings PC Programming Manual 701 6 ...

Page 702: ...erences 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Character Input Mode Selects the character table to be used for entering charact...

Page 703: ... 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 6 Flash Recall Terminate 1 11 7 External Feature Access EFA Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the extension s Incoming Call Log memory Value Range 0 100 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming...

Page 704: ...er mode When Automatic is selected the bearer mode is set automatically depending on the extension s telephone type as follows PT Speech SLT Audio Value Range Automatic Speech Audio Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY Option 8 Shelf Indicates t...

Page 705: ...number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide References None PC Prog...

Page 706: ...sion Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group CW w o Tone Ring after Call Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the moment that the extension goes on hook for the previous call Value Range Disable...

Page 707: ...mmediately after the previous unanswered call When receiving two calls in quick succession e g when a call waiting in a queue is directed to an extension immediately after the previous unanswered call stops ringing some SLTs require a pause after the first call stops ringing to receive the second call s Caller ID information Value Range 0 15 s Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension...

Page 708: ...xtension in 5 16 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Value Range 0 3000 s Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 5 14 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Member List Wrap up Timer 5 16 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Options Wrap up Timer based on Feature Guide References 1 2 2 ...

Page 709: ...e Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 70...

Page 710: ...sion Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PDN Delayed Ringing Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension an extension with one or more PDN buttons Value Range Immediate 1 Ring 2 Rings 3 Rings 4 Rings 5 Rings 6 Rings Maintenance Console Location...

Page 711: ...erty IPCMPR Port Number Built in Communication Assistant Server Feature Guide References 1 32 3 CA Communication Assistant FWD DND Call Forwarding FWD and Do Not Disturb DND settings for each extension can be referred FWD and DND settings can be programmed separately for each extension in 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Shelf Indicates the shelf type and or position reference only Value Range Fo...

Page 712: ...tenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 25 1 1 Slot P...

Page 713: ...or incoming trunk calls reference only Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD DND Set for Call from CO Indicates the current DND status for incoming trunk calls reference only Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4...

Page 714: ...ure Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD FWD Destination for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls reference only Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call For...

Page 715: ...xtension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND FWD Mode for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls reference only Value Range None FWD All FWD Busy FWD N A FWD Busy N A Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual Ref...

Page 716: ... Wired Extension FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD FWD No Answer Time Indicates the length of time that an incoming call rings at the extension before the call is forwarded reference only Value Range 0 120 s Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 ...

Page 717: ...es 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Location Entry Number to Generate Specifies the number of locations to be programmed A CLIP number will only be assigned to connected wired extensions even if the number entered here is larger than the total number of wired extensions Value Range 1 total number of connected wired extensions Maintenance Console Location 6 2 4 ...

Page 718: ...sole Location 6 2 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Parameter Tail of ID Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Consol...

Page 719: ...Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP PC Programming Manual 719 6 2 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings CLIP Generate ...

Page 720: ... None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY Forward DND For internal calls Specifies the FWD DND setting for internal calls If Always All Busy No Answer or Busy No Answer is selected the FWD destination field can be set If For both external calls and internal calls is checked this setting becomes unavailable and the value set for external calls is applied ...

Page 721: ...120 s Maintenance Console Location 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD PC Programming Manual 721 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND ...

Page 722: ...eed Dialling number to call using the Personal Speed Dialling Directory shown on the extension s display Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 4 4 1 3 Wired Extension Speed Dial Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System Dialling Number Specifies the number to be dialled by the Personal Speed Dialling number Value Range...

Page 723: ...s see 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons in the Feature Guide Display Option Key Setting Type Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible button Value Range Not Stored Loop CO Single CO Group CO DSS One touch ICD Group Message Waiting FWD DND Both FWD DND External FWD DND Internal Group Fwd Both Group Fwd External Group Fwd Internal Account Conference Terminate EFA Charge Call Park Call Log Log in L...

Page 724: ...ntenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection for Call Park Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone Value Range Automatic Specific Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming ...

Page 725: ... 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out Parameter Selection for Time Service Selects which time modes are switched manually Value Range All Day Night Lunch Break Day Night Break Day Night Lunch Day Night Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Featur...

Page 726: ...e Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 8 For KX TDE600 1 32 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Parameter Selection for SDN Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button Value Range Immediate 1 Ring 2 Rings 3 Rings 4 Rings 5 Rings 6 Rings No Ring Maintenance Cons...

Page 727: ...ng extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension Number for Message Waiting Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for w...

Page 728: ...red Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features Extension Number for Group Fwd External Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are forwarded Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexi...

Page 729: ... number of an incoming call distribution group for which call log information is displayed If the cell is left empty the extension will display its own call log information Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension Number for Log in Log out Specifies th...

Page 730: ...ences None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature Extension Number for Two way Record Specifies the floating extension number of the VM DPT group containing the extension s mailbox Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integ...

Page 731: ...ion 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Extension Number for SDN Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to this SDN button Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to fun...

Page 732: ...X can have a maximum of 2000 with the KX TDE100 KX TDE200 or 5000 with the KX TDE600 One touch Dialling buttons for extensions and DSS Consoles Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 2 One touch Dialling Dial for ISDN Se...

Page 733: ...Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Label Name Specifies the name of each flexible button on the KX NT366 IP PT The name specified here is displayed on the LCD for each button A maximum of 48 flexible buttons can be customised for ...

Page 734: ...00 series except KX DT321 KX T7600 series except KX T7665 IP PT except KX NT265 KX NT321 1 30 KX DT321 KX T7665 KX NT265 KX NT321 1 8 Even if ring tone 9 30 is selected ring tone 1 is heard Other telephones 1 8 Even if ring tone 9 30 is selected ring tone 2 is heard Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References No...

Page 735: ...lue Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Display Option Key Setting Key Label Name The Key Label Name function allows you to print out a key label template for flexible buttons according to the telephone you are using Click a f...

Page 736: ...r for Group Fwd External 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Extension Number for Group Fwd Internal 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Extension Number for Call Log 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Extension Number for Log in Log out 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Display Option Key S...

Page 737: ...rameter Selection for Group CO 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Parameter Selection for Call Park 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Parameter Selection for Log in Log out 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Parameter Selection for Time Service 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Display Op...

Page 738: ...to Ext No of Mailbox on the Key Setting screen Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Ext No of Mailbox for Two way Transfer Feature Guide References None Label Specifies the label that will be printed next to the corresponding button Value Range Max 20 characters Main...

Page 739: ...lick Choose to select a colour Value Range Any colour Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Font Size Specifies the size of the font on the label for the corresponding button Value Range 4 15 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None PC P...

Page 740: ...late Value Range T7633 T7636 T7625 T7630 NT136 T7665 NT265 NT321 T7667 APT NT343 NT346 DT346 DT343 DT333 NT343 NT346 with 60CO Other Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 740 PC Programming Manual 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button ...

Page 741: ...e extensions can be selected To select all extensions at once click Select All When selecting multiple extensions note that if the source extension has an SDN button the copy operation cannot be performed Maintenance Console Location 6 6 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Flexible button data copy Programming Manual References 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Feature Guide References N...

Page 742: ...ouch access Value Range Not Stored One Touch Maintenance Console Location 6 7 4 1 5 Wired Extension PF Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons Dial Specifies the number to be dialled Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 6 7 4 1 5 Wired Extension PF Button Programming Manual ...

Page 743: ...tatus data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension This setting is automatically set to ON when the feature is used and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF to cancel data transmission Value Range OFF ON Maintenance Console Location 6 8 4 1 6 Wired Extension NDSS Link Data Send Programming Manual References 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network Dire...

Page 744: ...he Feature Guide Shelf Indicates the shelf type reference only Value Range Physical Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message Programming...

Page 745: ...e Location 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Feature Guide References None Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings M...

Page 746: ...age recording space are available for each extension Value Range None Card1 A Card1 B Card2 A Card2 B Maintenance Console Location 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Maximum SVM Log Specifies the maximum number of voice messages not including greeting messages that can be stored for the extension Value Range 1 100 Mai...

Page 747: ... 5 7 3 2 User Group for more details Main Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension No Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 char...

Page 748: ...ompose tenants call pickup groups and paging groups Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 32 For KX TDE600 1 96 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 2 Group 2 2 3 Tenant Service COS Specifies the COS of the PS Value Range 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Set...

Page 749: ...eeping PINs secret b Selecting complex random PINs that cannot be easily guessed c Changing PINs frequently Value Range Max 10 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN Intercept Destination Extension Number Indicates the extensi...

Page 750: ...ntercept Routing DND Note that Intercept Routing Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination When Called Party is Busy below Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Intercept Destination Intercept Destination When Call...

Page 751: ...e only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension No Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual Refere...

Page 752: ...Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA Day Lunch Break Night Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing ISDN CLIP Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Statio...

Page 753: ...d Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP CLIP on Extension CO Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party s telephone Value Range Extension Show the CLIP number specified in CLIP ID on the Option 1 tab CO Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number in 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port or 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable St...

Page 754: ...Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP COLR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the PS on the caller s telephone display when answering a call Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Prese...

Page 755: ...ences 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension Name Feature Guide References None Ring Pattern Table Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the PS Value Range 1 8 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4 15 2 8 1 Ring Tone Patterns Call from CO 4 16 2 8 2 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Doorphone 4 17 2 8 3 Ring Tone Patterns ...

Page 756: ...Call Transfer without Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 12 1 Call Transfer ARS Itemised Code Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for ident...

Page 757: ...s Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension No Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension Name Feature Guide References None Manual C Waiting for Extension Call Selects the ...

Page 758: ...aintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting Pickup Dial Set Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature The number specified in Pickup Dial No on this screen is dialled automatically after going off hook when the Hot Line feature is active Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 ...

Page 759: ...Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 7 Hot Line Option 3 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension No Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifie...

Page 760: ...nsole Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Executive Override Deny Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions Value Range Disable Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call Enable Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call Maintenance Console...

Page 761: ...s reached the PS cannot be used to make further trunk calls The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options Digits After Decimal Point in 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Value Range 0 9999999 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Feature Guide References 1 9 2 Budget Man...

Page 762: ...er going off hook to make a call Value Range No Line No line is seized Idle An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups ICM PDN An extension line is seized or for a PDN extension an idle PDN button is selected F 1 F 12 A trunk programmed for a flexible button F 1 F 12 is seized A flexible button customised as a Single CO Group CO Loop CO or ICD Group button must be selec...

Page 763: ...or ICD Group button must be selected Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Feature Guide References 1 4 1 2 Line Preference Incoming Call Waiting Tone Type Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension Value Range CW Tone 1 CW Tone 2 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4...

Page 764: ... 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension No Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension Name F...

Page 765: ...ge Caller ID Name CO Line Name DDI DID Name Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 20 4 Display Information Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console...

Page 766: ...ue Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension Name Feature Guide References None Flexible Button Programming Mode Specifies whether the PS user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation or only the One touch Dialling buttons When the mode is set to One touch Dial ther...

Page 767: ...le Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Message Feature Guide References 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Option 7 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manu...

Page 768: ...r entering characters Value Range Table 1 Standard mode Table 2 Option mode Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash Mode during CO Conversation Selects the function of the FLASH RECALL button during a trunk conversation Value Range EFA Terminate Flash Recall Maintenance Console Location 6 10 ...

Page 769: ...Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Incoming Call Log Outgoing Call Log Memory Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialled by the PS that are retained in the PS s Outgoing Call Log memory Value Range 1 100 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial ISDN Bearer Selects the ISDN ...

Page 770: ... Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension No Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3...

Page 771: ...ther call when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group This timer is used when Options Wrap up Timer based on is set to Extension in 5 16 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Value Range 0 3000 s Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 5 14 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Me...

Page 772: ...0 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension Name Feature Guide References None PDN Delayed Ringing Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension an extension with one or more PDN buttons Value Range Immediate 1 Ring 2 Rings 3 Rings 4 Rings 5 Rings 6 Rings Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station ...

Page 773: ... Feature Guide References 1 32 3 CA Communication Assistant FWD DND Reference Call Forwarding FWD and Do Not Disturb DND settings for each PS can be referred FWD and DND settings can be programmed separately for each PS in 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Locat...

Page 774: ...Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD DND Set for Call from CO Indicates the current DND status for incoming trunk calls reference only Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming ...

Page 775: ...ll from CO Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls reference only Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD FWD Set for Call from Extension Indicates the current F...

Page 776: ...Not Disturb DND FWD Mode for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls reference only Value Range None FWD All FWD Busy FWD N A FWD Busy N A Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD FWD Destination for Call from...

Page 777: ...wer Time Indicates the length of time that an incoming call rings at the PS before the call is forwarded reference only Value Range 0 120 s Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD PC Programming Manual 777 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension S...

Page 778: ...ces 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Location Entry Number to Generate Specifies the number of locations to be programmed A CLIP number will only be assigned to registered PS extensions even if the number entered here is larger than the total number of PS extensions Value Range 1 total number of connected wired extensions Maintenance Console Location 6 11 4 2 1...

Page 779: ...e Location 6 11 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Parameter Tail of ID Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Conso...

Page 780: ...Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 780 PC Programming Manual 6 11 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings CLIP Generate ...

Page 781: ...re Guide References 1 3 1 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY Forward DND For internal calls Specifies the FWD DND setting for internal calls If Always All Busy No Answer or Busy No Answer is selected the FWD destination field can be set If For both external calls and internal calls is checked this setting becomes unavailable and the value set for external calls is applied to internal...

Page 782: ...0 s Maintenance Console Location 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 782 PC Programming Manual 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND ...

Page 783: ... DND Internal Group Fwd Both Group Fwd External Group Fwd Internal Account Conference Terminate EFA Charge Call Park Log in Log out Hurry up Wrap up Time Service TRS Level Change ISDN Service CLIR COLR ISDN Hold Time Service Automatic Manual Two way Record Two way Transfer LCS Voice Mail Transfer NDSS CTI PDN SDN Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming ...

Page 784: ...cifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone Value Range Automatic Specific Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 13 2 Call Park Parameter Selection for Log in Log out Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to are log...

Page 785: ...Night Lunch Break Day Night Break Day Night Lunch Day Night Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Parameter Selection for TRS Level Change Specifies the TRS Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain PS Value Range 1 7 Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Fle...

Page 786: ...on The value specified here is only used when System Wireless SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD on 4 18 2 9 System Options is set to Enable Value Range Immediate 1 Ring 2 Rings 3 Rings 4 Rings 5 Rings 6 Rings No Ring Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 4 System Wireless SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD Feature...

Page 787: ...xible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension Number for Message Waiting Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked If this cell is left empty the PS will check its own messages only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3...

Page 788: ...xtension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are forwarded Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features Extension Number for Group Fwd Internal Specifies the floating extension number o...

Page 789: ...e Feature Guide References None Extension Number for Hurry up Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected Manual Queue Redirection Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 4 Que...

Page 790: ...ax 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Extension Number for Voice Mail Transfer Specifies the floating extension number of the VM DTMF DPT group containing the desired mailbox Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Con...

Page 791: ...e References 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension when an extension number is specified reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Dial for One touch Specifies the number...

Page 792: ... Feature Guide References 1 21 1 12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Dial for NDSS Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station Selection Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table can be specified here Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash ...

Page 793: ...l Park button with Parameter Selection for Call Park on this screen set to Specific is pressed Value Range 0 99 Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 13 2 Call Park Ext No of Mailbox for Two way Transfer Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One ...

Page 794: ...le Button Programming Manual References 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Extension Number for DSS 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Extension Number for ICD Group 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Extension Number for Message Waiting 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Display Op...

Page 795: ...e touch 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Dial for ISDN Service 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Dial for NDSS Feature Guide References None Parameter 1 This parameter is equivalent to Parameter Selection on the Key Setting screen Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual Re...

Page 796: ...exible Button Programming Manual References 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Optional Parameter or Ringing Tone Type Number for Time Service 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Optional Parameter or Ringing Tone Type Number for Call Park Feature Guide References None Mailbox Number This parameter is equivalent to Ext No of Ma...

Page 797: ...d To select all PSs at once click Select All When selecting multiple extensions note that if the source extension has an SDN button the copy operation cannot be performed Maintenance Console Location 6 14 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Flexible button data copy Programming Manual References 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 797 ...

Page 798: ...us data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension This setting is automatically set to ON when the feature is used and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF to cancel data transmission Value Range OFF ON Maintenance Console Location 6 15 4 2 4 Portable Station NDSS Link Data Send Programming Manual References 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network ...

Page 799: ... Console Location 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Feature Guide References None Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension...

Page 800: ...n 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Maximum of SVM Log Specifies the maximum number of voice messages not including greeting messages that can be stored for the extension Value Range 1 100 Maintenance Console Location 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Messa...

Page 801: ... necessary to save these settings separately from system data For more information on flexible buttons see 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons in the Feature Guide Pair Extension Specifies the extension number of the PT to be used in pair with the DSS Console Note that if one or more SDN buttons have been set at the DSS Console they must be deleted before this setting can be changed Value Range None Max 5 dig...

Page 802: ...ccessed Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 128 For KX TDE600 1 640 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection for Group CO Specifies the trunk group to be accessed Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 64 For KX TDE600 1 96 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console 802 PC Programm...

Page 803: ...g out Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the paired extension belongs to are logged in to or logged out from Value Range None The incoming call distribution group is selected manually All All incoming call distribution groups that the paired extension belongs to Incoming Group A pre specified incoming call distribution group Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Pro...

Page 804: ...ain extension Value Range 1 7 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 1 9 4 Dial Tone Transfer Parameter Selection for Time Service Automatic Manual Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 8 ...

Page 805: ...ture Guide References 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Extension Number for DSS Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension Number for ICD Group Specifies the floating extension num...

Page 806: ...e Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension Number for Group Fwd Both Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk calls are forwarded Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 ...

Page 807: ...tion group for which intercom calls are forwarded Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features Extension Number for Call Log Specifies the paired extension s number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for...

Page 808: ...erences None Extension Number for Hurry up Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected Manual Queue Redirection Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature Extension Number for Two way ...

Page 809: ...d mailbox Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Extension Number for Voice Mail Transfer Specifies the floating extension number of the VM DTMF DPT group containing the desired mailbox Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Con...

Page 810: ...nces None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension when an extension number is specified reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Dial for One touch Specifies the number to be dialled The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 ...

Page 811: ... Feature Guide References 1 21 1 12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Dial for NDSS Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station Selection Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table can be specified here Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash ...

Page 812: ...nge KX DT300 series except KX DT321 KX T7600 series except KX T7665 IP PT except KX NT265 KX NT321 1 30 KX DT321 KX T7665 KX NT265 KX NT321 1 8 Even if ring tone 9 30 is selected ring tone 1 is heard Other telephones 1 8 Even if ring tone 9 30 is selected ring tone 2 is heard Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Optional...

Page 813: ...nsion each time Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Display Option Key Setting Key Label Name The Key Label Name function allows you to print out a key label template for flexible DSS buttons according to the DSS Console you are using Click ...

Page 814: ...Display Option Key Setting Extension Number for Call Log 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Display Option Key Setting Extension Number for Log in Log out 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Display Option Key Setting Extension Number for Hurry up 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Display Option Key Setting Extension Number for Two way Record 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Display Option Key Setting Extension Number for Two way Transfer 6 17 4 3 DS...

Page 815: ... Parameter Selection for Time Service Automatic Manual 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Display Option Key Setting Parameter Selection for SDN Feature Guide References None Parameter 2 This parameter is equivalent to Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number on the Key Setting screen Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Display Option Key Setti...

Page 816: ...le Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Colour of Font Specifies the colour used for the label text for the corresponding button Click Choose to select a colour Value Range Any colour Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Colour of Background Specifies the colour used for the label background f...

Page 817: ...ponding button Value Range 4 15 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DSS Type DSS Type Selects the type of DSS Console for which you want to print a key label template Value Range T7640 DT390 Other Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None PC Programming Manual 817 6 17 4 3 DSS ...

Page 818: ...Feature Guide References None 818 PC Programming Manual 6 17 4 3 DSS Console ...

Page 819: ...tion DSS Console Select the number of the DSS Console and paired extension Multiple DSS Consoles can be selected To select all DSS Consoles at once click Select All When selecting multiple extensions note that if the source extension has an SDN button the copy operation cannot be performed Maintenance Console Location 6 18 4 3 DSS Console DSS key data copy Programming Manual References 6 17 4 3 DS...

Page 820: ...820 PC Programming Manual 6 18 4 3 DSS Console DSS key data copy ...

Page 821: ...Section 7 5 Optional Device PC Programming Manual 821 ...

Page 822: ...sole Location 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call Physical Location Slot Indicates the slot to which the doorphone is connected reference only Value Range Slot and sub slot number Maintenance Console Location 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call Physical Location Port Indi...

Page 823: ...ramming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call Destination Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the destination number of doorphone calls for each port in each time mode Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Programming Manual References 4 6 2 4 Week Table Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Cal...

Page 824: ...strictions on intercom calls from certain extensions Internal Call Block Value Range 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Programming Manual References 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings TRS TRS Level Day Lunch Break Night 4 14 2 7 3 Class of Service Internal Call Block Feature Guide References 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block 1 17 1 Doorphone Call VM Trunk Group Number Specifies t...

Page 825: ...8 Maintenance Console Location 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration PC Programming Manual 825 7 1 5 1 Doorphone ...

Page 826: ...ting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 7 2 5 2 External Pager Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging 1 17 3 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS 1 17 4 Background Music BGM Page Number 1 Page Number 2 Name Specifies the name of the external pager Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 7 2 5 2 External Pager Programming Manual References None ...

Page 827: ...nd trunk calls can be made Trunk Intercom calls and TIE line calls without PBX code can be made TIE line calls with PBX code and trunk calls are restricted All All calls are restricted Maintenance Console Location 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9 5 Walking COS 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry DISA Security Remote Walking COS through D...

Page 828: ...ts are busy Selects how DISA calls are handled if all DISA ports are currently in use Value Range to Operator to AA 0 to AA 9 Disable Busy Tone Maintenance Console Location 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DISA Intercept Intercept when No Dial after DISA answers Selects how DISA calls are handled if the caller does not select any ...

Page 829: ...e Message DISA System Programming Manual References 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Option 1 CO CO with DISA Fwd Transfer to Public CO Feature Guide References None CO CO with DISA DISA to Private Network Specifies whether the DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk to private trunk call using DISA is established To enable this setting CO CO with DISA Fwd Transfer to Private Net...

Page 830: ...Programming Manual References 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Option 1 CO CO with DISA DISA to Public CO Feature Guide References None CO CO with DISA Fwd Transfer to Private Network Enables trunk to private trunk calls to be established using DISA Value Range Disable Trunk to private trunk calls are established without using DISA Enable Get DISA Trunk to private trunk calls are established us...

Page 831: ...nu by DTMF Enables a trunk caller to return to the DISA top menu by pressing while hearing a ringback reorder or busy tone If disabled retrying the call is possible by pressing Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Option 2 DISA Cyclic Tone Detection Selects the cyclic tone detect...

Page 832: ...Time Specifies the maximum duration of the cyclic tone that will be recognised by the PBX When the tone sent from the telephone company is shorter than the value set here the PBX recognises it as a tone on Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to Option To apply changes to this setting follow the steps below 1 Change this setting 2 Set the stat...

Page 833: ...ng Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Feature Guide References None DISA Cyclic Tone Option Repeating Times of ON OFF for Detection Specifies the number of times the tone pattern a set of tone on and tone off must be received to establish reception of the cyclic tone This determines the end of call Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection o...

Page 834: ...ilable on the card To apply changes to this setting follow the steps below 1 Change this setting 2 Set the status of the OPB3 card to OUS then INS Value Range Low About 120 minutes of messages can be recorded per card Middle About 60 minutes of messages can be recorded per card High About 20 minutes of messages can be recorded per card Maintenance Console Location 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA Syst...

Page 835: ...2 Voice Message DISA Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Name Specifies the name of the OGM Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM 1 17 6 Direct Inward Sys...

Page 836: ...nward System Access DISA Busy DND Message No Selects the OGM to be played for the caller when the destination party is busy or sets DND Value Range None 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Programming Manual References 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 836 PC Programming Manual 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Mes...

Page 837: ... 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM SVM Card No 1 2 Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number used to access the SVM feature Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM SV...

Page 838: ... recorded Maintenance Console Location 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM Programming Manual References 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Message Feature Guide References 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Remote Access Selects whether the Walking COS feature can be used while listening to a greeting message from the SVM feature Usin...

Page 839: ...ves is optional as specified in SVM Cyclic Tone Option on this screen Maintenance Console Location 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM SVM Cyclic Tone Option Tone On Maximum Time Specifies the maximum duration of the cyclic tone that will be recognised by the PBX When the tone sent from the tel...

Page 840: ...R card or OPB3 card to OUS then INS See 3 5 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property or 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Value Range 20 n n 6 200 ms Maintenance Console Location 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM SVM Cyclic Tone Option Repeating Times of ON OFF for Detection Specifies the number of times t...

Page 841: ...Feature Guide References 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM PC Programming Manual 841 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM ...

Page 842: ...Relay Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 9 External Relay Control Physical Location Shelf KX TDE600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 7 6 5 4 External Relay Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 9 External Relay Control Physical Location Slot Indicates the slot position ref...

Page 843: ... Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 7 6 5 4 External Relay Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 9 External Relay Control Name Specifies the relay name Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 7 6 5 4 External Relay Programming Manual References None PC Programming Manual 843 7 6 5 4 External Re...

Page 844: ...9 External Relay Control COS Number Specifies the Class of Service COS number COS programming determines the extensions that are able to activate relays Value Range 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 7 6 5 4 External Relay Programming Manual References 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Optional Device Other Extensions External Relay Access Feature Guide References 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block...

Page 845: ... KX TDE600 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 7 7 5 5 External Sensor Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 8 External Sensor Physical Location Shelf KX TDE600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 7 7 5 5 External Sensor Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 8 External Sensor Phys...

Page 846: ...ndicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 7 7 5 5 External Sensor Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 8 External Sensor Name Specifies the sensor name Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 7 7 5 5 External Sensor Programming Manual References None 846 PC Programming Manual 7 7 5 5 External Sensor ...

Page 847: ...References None Feature Guide References 1 17 8 External Sensor Tenant No Specifies the tenant to which the sensor belongs to determine the Time Table for the sensor The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 8 For KX TDE600 1 32 Maintenance Console Location 7 7 5 5 External Sensor Programming Manual References 4 6 2 4 Week Table Feature Guide Refe...

Page 848: ...848 PC Programming Manual 7 7 5 5 External Sensor ...

Page 849: ...Section 8 6 Feature PC Programming Manual 849 ...

Page 850: ... to be programmed Whether a tenant uses the basic System Speed Dialling Table or the additional table depends on the setting of System Speed Dial in 8 6 6 6 Tenant Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 Basic Memory the standard table Expansion for Tenant 1 8 additional tables For KX TDE600 Basic Memory the standard table Expansion for Tenant 1 32 additional tables Maintenance Console Location 8 1 6 ...

Page 851: ...fies the CLI destination extension to which incoming calls from the programmed telephone number are routed If a Caller ID Modification Table is being used the modified number must match the telephone number above CO Line Access Number Telephone Number in order for the call to be routed correctly Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 8 1 6 1 System Speed Dial Progr...

Page 852: ...RY 1 27 2 Room Status Control SMDR for External Hotel Application 1 Room Status Control Selects whether check in and check out data is output on SMDR Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References 13 1 11 1 Main Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 27 2 Room Status Control SMDR for External Hotel Appli...

Page 853: ...tered in its place when the message is selected from an extension This character can be used a maximum of seven times in a Printing Message Value Range Max 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References 13 1 11 1 Main Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 26 2 Printing Message Bill Checkout Billing Billing for Guest...

Page 854: ...ng for Guest Room Checkout Billing LCD for Minibar Specifies the name of charge item 2 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering room charges Value Range Max 12 characters Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 27 3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing LCD for Others Specifies the name of c...

Page 855: ...cters Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 27 3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing Bill SMDR for Minibar Specifies the name of charge item 2 as printed on the guest bill Value Range Max 12 characters Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 27 ...

Page 856: ...s the language used for standard items shown on guest bills printed out using the Call Billing feature Value Range Language 1 Language 5 Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 27 3 Call Billing for Guest Room SMDR for External Hotel Application Header 1 3 Specifies the text printed at the top of the guest bill Value Range Max...

Page 857: ...uest Room Charge Margin Tax Margin Rate for Telephone Specifies the percentage margin to be added to telephone charges displayed on the guest bill Value Range 0 00 99 99 Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 3 Call Charge Services 1 27 3 Call Billing for Guest Room Margin Tax Tax Rate for Telephone Specifies the percentag...

Page 858: ...99 99 Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 27 3 Call Billing for Guest Room Margin Tax Tax Rate for Others Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest charges for charge item 3 Value Range 0 00 99 99 Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Re...

Page 859: ...urrency Specifies the currency characters shown on the display of the extension and the SMDR Value Range Max 3 characters Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit 8 3 6 3 Verification Code Budget Management Feature Guide Refe...

Page 860: ...d and then the call is disconnected Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit Feature Guide References 1 9 2 Budget Management Charge Options Meter Start on Answer Detection Enables the PBX to start counting the call charge wh...

Page 861: ...Feature Guide References 1 26 3 Call Charge Services PC Programming Manual 861 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge ...

Page 862: ...sole Location 8 3 6 3 Verification Code Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry User Name Specifies the user name assigned to the verification code Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 8 3 6 3 Verification Code Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry Verification Code PIN Speci...

Page 863: ... Number Specifies the COS that applies when making a trunk call with the verification code Value Range 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 8 3 6 3 Verification Code Programming Manual References 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Feature Guide References 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Itemised Billing Code for ARS Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS fe...

Page 864: ... on the verification code The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options Digits After Decimal Point in 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Value Range 0 9999999 Maintenance Console Location 8 3 6 3 Verification Code Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9 2 Budget Management 864 PC Programming Manual 8 3 6 3 Verification Code ...

Page 865: ...s of codes click the applicable tab Second Dial Tone Waiting Code Specifies the Second Dial Tone Waiting code Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 8 4 6 4 Second Dial Tone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion Pause Repeating Counter Specifies the number of pauses to be inserted when waiting for the second dial to...

Page 866: ... maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed and any extension user can select one of them Absent Message Specifies the message for display Value Range Max 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 8 5 6 5 Absent Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Absent Message 866 PC Programming Manual 8 5 6 5 Absent Message ...

Page 867: ...M7 BGM8 Tone Maintenance Console Location 8 6 6 6 Tenant Programming Manual References 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM Feature Guide References 1 13 4 Music on Hold 2 2 3 Tenant Service Operator Extension Number Specifies the extension number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be designated as the tenant operator When this parameter is left unspecified the PBX operator...

Page 868: ...e Location 8 6 6 6 Tenant Programming Manual References 10 1 8 1 System Setting Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 2 2 3 Tenant Service System Speed Dial Specifies which system speed dialling table is used by the tenant Value Range Same as System Setting PBX common system speed dialling numbers are used Tenant Exclusive Individual tenant system speed dialling numbers are...

Page 869: ...Section 9 7 TRS PC Programming Manual 869 ...

Page 870: ...ding digits of the dialled number are not found in the applicable Denied Code Tables the call is made A maximum of 100 denied codes can be programmed for each level 20 codes are displayed at a time To display other sets of codes click the applicable tab Denied Code Tables Level 2 Level 6 Specifies the leading digits of toll restricted numbers for each level Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of ...

Page 871: ...is checked against the applicable Exception Code Tables and if a match is found the call is made A maximum of 100 exception codes can be programmed for each level 20 codes are displayed at a time To display other sets of codes click the applicable tab Exception Code Tables Level 2 Level 6 Specifies the leading digits of the numbers to be exempted from toll restriction call barring for each level V...

Page 872: ...gits A maximum of 20 with the KX TDE100 KX TDE200 or 100 with the KX TDE600 Special Carrier Access Codes can be programmed With the KX TDE600 20 codes are displayed at a time To show other sets of codes click the applicable tab Special Carrier Access Code Specifies a Special Carrier Access Code Special Carrier Access Codes and Host PBX Access codes should be unique Value Range Max 16 digits consis...

Page 873: ...regarded A maximum of 10 emergency numbers can be programmed Emergency Number Specifies the numbers used for making emergency calls It is not necessary to start the emergency number with a Trunk Access number Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 9 4 7 4 Emergency Dial Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 ...

Page 874: ...ure Guide References 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring TRS Check for Dial Enables a TRS Barring check for the user dialled and This is useful in preventing unauthorised calls which could possibly be made through certain telephone company exchanges Value Range No Check Check Maintenance Console Location 9 5 7 5 Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References ...

Page 875: ...ves a trunk call If the number of dialled digits exceeds the programmed limit the line will be disconnected Value Range None 1 7 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 7 5 Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 1 11 8 Trunk Call Limitation TRS Check after EFA Enables TRS Barring to check the digits dialled after External ...

Page 876: ...eny Table 2_N Except Table N_6 The Denied Code Tables for the higher levels are applied to all levels below it and the Exception Code Tables for the lower levels are applied to all levels above it Deny Table N Except Table N Each level has its own separate set of denied codes and exception codes which are only applied to that level Maintenance Console Location 9 5 7 5 Miscellaneous Programming Man...

Page 877: ...Section 10 8 ARS PC Programming Manual 877 ...

Page 878: ...on user makes a call using Idle Line Access Trunk Access or S CO Line Access method Maintenance Console Location 10 1 8 1 System Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Mode When Any Carrier is not programmed for the Dial Selects what happens when the dialled number is not found in Leading Number in 10 2 8 2 Lead...

Page 879: ...f digits of the user dialled number excluding the leading number 100 leading numbers are displayed at a time To display other sets of leading numbers click the applicable tab Leading Number Specifies the leading number Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and X Maintenance Console Location 10 2 8 2 Leading Number Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic R...

Page 880: ... leading number Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 16 For KX TDE600 1 48 Maintenance Console Location 10 2 8 2 Leading Number Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 880 PC Programming Manual 10 2 8 2 Leading Number ...

Page 881: ...s and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list To adjust the currently displayed Routing Plan click and drag the divisions between two time periods To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Routing Plan including adding or deleting time blocks click Time Setting PC Programming Manual 881 10 3 8 3 Rout...

Page 882: ...Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 4 8 3 Routing Plan Time Time Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Time A D Hour Minute Specifies the start time for each time block Value Range 00 00 23 59 Maintenance Console Location 10 4 8 3 Routing Plan Time Time Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide...

Page 883: ...elect the desired day of the week by clicking the applicable tab Time A Time D Specifies the carrier to be given priority for each time zone Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 None 1 10 For KX TDE600 None 1 48 Maintenance Console Location 10 5 8 4 Routing Plan Priority Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS PC Programming Manual 883 10 5 8...

Page 884: ...ion 10 6 8 5 Carrier Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Removed Number of Digits Specifies the number of leading digits to remove from the user dialled number Value Range 0 15 Maintenance Console Location 10 6 8 5 Carrier Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Modify Command Spec...

Page 885: ...ts consisting of 0 9 and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 10 6 8 5 Carrier Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS TRG 01 TRG 64 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 or TRG 01 TRG 96 KX TDE600 Selects the trunk groups that connect to the carrier TRG 01 TRG 64 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 or TRG 01 TRG 96 KX TDE600 Enables each trunk group for each carrier If a ce...

Page 886: ...odify Command on the Carrier tab Authorisation Code for Tenant Tenant 1 Tenant 32 Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each tenant Note For the KX TDE100 KX TDE200 only up to 8 tenants are available Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 8 5 Carrier Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selectio...

Page 887: ...ifferent leading number exceptions can be programmed 40 leading number exception entries are displayed on the screen at a time To display other sets click the applicable tab Leading Number Exception Specifies the leading number exception Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and X Maintenance Console Location 10 7 8 6 Leading Number Exception Programming Manual References None Feature Guide ...

Page 888: ...display other groups click the applicable tab Authorisation Code for Trunk Group TRG 01 TRG 64 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 or TRG 01 TRG 96 KX TDE600 Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each trunk group Value Range Max 10 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 8 8 7 Authorisation Code for TRG Programming Manual References 10 6 8 5 Carrier Carrier Modify Command Featu...

Page 889: ...Section 11 9 Private Network PC Programming Manual 889 ...

Page 890: ...splayed at a time To display other priority sets click the applicable tab Using a private network up to 8 PBXs can share one VPS centralised VM connected to another PBX This VPS can provide voice mail for extensions attached to any of the PBXs in the network Only extension numbers of 4 digits or less using the Extension Number Method are supported Own PBX Code Specifies the PBX code of the local P...

Page 891: ...nces None Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the dialled number in place of the removed digits for each priority Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Trunk Group Specifies the trunk grou...

Page 892: ...BX code of other PBXs in the TIE line network Value Range Max 3 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Enhanced QSIG Call Information Optional SD Card Required Enables Network Message Waiting information to be sent from the PBX to which the VPS is attached to extensions connect...

Page 893: ...Maintenance Console Location 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail PC Programming Manual 893 11 1 9 1 TIE Table ...

Page 894: ...e Network ID to two PBXs will cause network data transmission problems Changing this value in Interactive mode will automatically clear any NDSS Link Data Value Range 0 The PBX retransmits BLF data sent by other PBXs 1 The PBX receives BLF data sent by other PBXs 2 8 The PBX transmits BLF data over the network Maintenance Console Location 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Programming Manual Refer...

Page 895: ... 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature Data Transmission Counter Specifies the maximum number of hops or transmissions between two PBXs before a packet of BLF data is discarded Value Range 1 63 Maintenance Console Location 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network Dire...

Page 896: ...being cancelled Value Range 0 10 Maintenance Console Location 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Enhanced QSIG Call Information Optional SD Card Required Feature Guide References 1 30 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature Data Re transmission Repeat Timer Specifies the length of time between repeated re ...

Page 897: ... Manual References 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Enhanced QSIG Call Information Optional SD Card Required Feature Guide References 1 30 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail PC Programming Manual 897 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission ...

Page 898: ...Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 11 3 9 3 Network Operator VoIP Programming Manual References 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature Network PBX ID Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS IP GW Card Slot No to notify BLF data to Network Operator Specifies the slot number wit...

Page 899: ... extension attached to another PBX that will be monitored The number input here can use either Extension Number Method or PBX Code Method Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 Networking Features 1 30 1 TIE Line Service 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Netwo...

Page 900: ...on is connected to reference only Value Range None 1 8 Maintenance Console Location 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table Programming Manual References 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature Network PBX ID Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS 900 PC Programming Manual 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table ...

Page 901: ...Section 12 10 CO Incoming Call PC Programming Manual 901 ...

Page 902: ...he shelf type and or position to which each trunk card belongs reference only Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 Physical Virtual For KX TDE600 Shelf number Virtual Maintenance Console Location 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each trunk card reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Lo...

Page 903: ...onnected reference only Value Range Card type Maintenance Console Location 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CO Name Specifies the trunk name which is shown on the extension s display when receiving a call from the trunk Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Programming Manual References None ...

Page 904: ...trunk group number to which the trunk belongs Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 64 For KX TDE600 1 96 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 2 Group 904 PC Programming Manual 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings ...

Page 905: ...IL distribution is set different DIL destinations can be programmed depending on the time mode day lunch break night Generally DIL distribution is used for trunk calls from analogue trunks Tenant number and VM trunk group number can also be programmed for each trunk To assign DIL destination numbers enter directly or click Destination Setting see 2 1 6 Extension Number Setting Shelf Indicates the ...

Page 906: ...ure Guide References None Card Type Indicates the trunk card type reference only Value Range Card type Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each trunk reference only Value Range Public Private TIE VPN 906 PC Programming M...

Page 907: ...ds on the trunk through which the calls arrive DDI DID Distribution depends on the DDI DID number of the calls MSN Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY DIL Destination Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the DIL destination in e...

Page 908: ...1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL 2 2 3 Tenant Service 2 2 4 Time Service VM Trunk Group No Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the DIL destination is the floating extension number of a VM DPT Group The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller Value Range 1 48 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settin...

Page 909: ... the shelf type and or position reference only Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 Physical Virtual For KX TDE600 Shelf number Virtual Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each trunk card reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Tab...

Page 910: ...intenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each trunk reference only Value Range Public Private TIE VPN Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None 910 PC Programming Manual 1...

Page 911: ... 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY CLI Ring for DIL Day Lunch Break Night Enables CLI distribution in each time mode Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL 1 1 ...

Page 912: ...one Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each trunk card reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings 912 PC Program...

Page 913: ...etworking type of each trunk reference only Value Range Public Private TIE VPN Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY 1 30 1 TIE Line Service 1 30 3 Virtual Private Network VPN Distribution Method Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls The value range o...

Page 914: ...igit Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming called number for DDI DID distribution or for TIE line service Value Range 0 15 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 1 30 1 T...

Page 915: ...ngs Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 1 30 1 TIE Line Service PC Programming Manual 915 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings ...

Page 916: ...2 1 6 Extension Number Setting It is possible to programme DDI DID numbers and DDI DID destinations in each time mode day lunch break night for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Automatic Registration or to programme DDI DID names for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Name Generate DDI DID Number Specifies the DDI DID number Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9...

Page 917: ...le Automatic Registration Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 8 For KX TDE600 1 32 Maintenance Console Location 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Programming Manual Refere...

Page 918: ...References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration CLI Ring for DDI DID Day Lunch Break Night Enables CLI distribution in each time mode Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Programming Manual References 8 1 6 1 System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Dire...

Page 919: ...ect Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Generate DDI DID Number From Specifies the DID number of the first location to be programmed DDI DID numbers for subsequent locations will be generated automatically by adding one to the value of the previous location Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 4 10 3 DDI DID Table Automatic Registration Programming Man...

Page 920: ...for a certain time mode click the appropriate Same all check box If the Same all check box for a certain time mode is not clicked the destination numbers for subsequent locations will be generated automatically by adding one to the value of the previous location for that time mode Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 4 10 3 DDI DID Table Automatic Registration...

Page 921: ...es 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Number to Generate Specifies the number of locations to be programmed Value Range 1 1000 Maintenance Console Location 12 5 10 3 DDI DID Table Name Generate Programming Manual References 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In D...

Page 922: ...5 10 3 DDI DID Table Name Generate Programming Manual References 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Name Suffix Specifies the text to be included at the end of each DDI DID name Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 5 10 3 DDI DID Table Name Generate Programming Manual References 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table...

Page 923: ...ers Select the card to programme or select All to display all matching cards MSN To assign MSN destination numbers enter directly or click Destination Setting see 2 1 6 Extension Number Setting Shelf KX TDE600 only Indicates the shelf number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 12 6 10 4 MSN Table Programming Manual Re...

Page 924: ...nd Maintenance Console Location 12 6 10 4 MSN Table Programming Manual References 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Feature Guide References 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service MSN Name Specifies the name for the MSN which is shown on the extension s display when receiving a call with the MSN Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 6 10 4 MSN Table Progr...

Page 925: ...e Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 8 For KX TDE600 1 32 Maintenance Console Location 12 6 10 4 MSN Table Programming Manual References 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port 4 6 2 4 Week Table Feature Guide References 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Se...

Page 926: ...d to the CLI destinations instead of the MSN destinations if the caller s identification number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode day lunch break night on a trunk basis Shelf KX TDE600 only Indicates the shelf number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Lo...

Page 927: ... Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CLI Ring for MSN Day Lunch Break Night Enables CLI distribution in each time mode Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 6 10 4 MSN Table Programming Manual References 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Feature Guide References 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Id...

Page 928: ...ination Maintenance Console Location 12 7 10 5 Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND Intercept Routing to Operator No Destination Destination is not programmed Enables the Intercept Routing No Destination feature to activate when there is no destination for the call The Intercept Routing No Destination feature...

Page 929: ...ting feature to operate for extension calls Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 7 10 5 Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 7 Intercept Routing No Destination PC Programming Manual 929 12 7 10 5 Miscellaneous ...

Page 930: ...930 PC Programming Manual 12 7 10 5 Miscellaneous ...

Page 931: ...Section 13 11 Maintenance PC Programming Manual 931 ...

Page 932: ...g Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR Format Port Selects the Serial Interface port that is used to output the SMDR data Value Range None LAN RS 232C Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR Format Page Length Number of L...

Page 933: ... page The number of lines for the skip perforation should be shorter than the page length Value Range 0 95 Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR Format Date Format Selects the printed date format Value Range MM DD YY DD MM YY YY MM DD YY DD MM Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1...

Page 934: ... dialled digits of outgoing trunk calls are printed Class of Service COS programming determines the printable records Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings CO SMDR Outgoing CO Call Printout SMDR Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Print Information Incoming Ca...

Page 935: ...int Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Print Information Log in Log out Specifies whether the log in log out status is printed Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out 1 2...

Page 936: ...l Print Information Timed Reminder Wake up Call Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 28 4 Timed Reminder Print Information Error Log Specifies whether PBX error log information is output ...

Page 937: ...tion 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 1 10 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Option Caller ID Number Name Selects the printing format of caller identifications for incoming trunk calls Value Range None Number Name Name Numbe...

Page 938: ...et Print Dialled Number Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 1 Memory Dialling Features SUMMARY 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Option Privacy Mode Selects whether private dialling is enabled or disabled and how many digits to hide when enabled To enable this setting Print Information Outgoing Call on the SMDR ...

Page 939: ...d Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Option Condition Code AN Specifies whether the time of answering an incoming trunk call is printed Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide R...

Page 940: ...ure Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR LAN SMDR Port Number Specifies the port number used to output SMDR data via the LAN Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR LAN SMDR Password Specifies the password used to output the SMDR data via the...

Page 941: ...re Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR RS 232C Communication Baud Rate Specifies the data transmission speed from the PBX to the printer or personal computer To ensure stable transmission when changing this setting to 57600 or 115200 bps set Communication Flow on this screen to Hardware Value Range 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps Main...

Page 942: ...acter Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the printer or personal computer Value Range None Mark Space Even Odd Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Communication Word Length Specifies the number of bits in each byte of a character When connecting the Mainten...

Page 943: ...lue Range None Hardware Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Communication Stop Bit Selects a stop bit code that indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of the printer or personal computer Value Range 1 bit 2 bit Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11...

Page 944: ...fies the command to manually initialise an external modem The command specified here is controlled by PT system programming External Modem Control 801 Value Range Max 30 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 1 PC Programming Maintenance Local Alarm Display Extension 1 Extension 2 Specifies the extension numbers of PTs...

Page 945: ...heck of the PBX for local alarm and error log Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 3 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time Hour Specifies the hour of the PBX daily self check start time Value Range 0 23 Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None PC Programmi...

Page 946: ...a Transmission for Centralised VM Feature Data Re transmission Repeat Counter in 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Enhanced QSIG Call Information Optional SD Card Required 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature Data Re transmi...

Page 947: ...the PBX to output local alarm information to a syslog server Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 2 Syslog Record Management Syslog Syslog Server IP Address Specifies the IP address of a syslog server Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual...

Page 948: ...put minor alarm information to a syslog server Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 2 Syslog Record Management Remote Remote Analogue Remote Modem Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number for analogue remote maintenance To enable this setting an RMT card must be installed a...

Page 949: ... this screen must be enabled Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 1 PC Programming Remote Remote Programming Enables system programming diagnosis and data upload from a remote location Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References ...

Page 950: ...ss the PBX from a remote location for maintenance purposes This number can be specified by Quick Setup Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 4 Quick Setup Password Passwords authorise the user to programme the extension and the PBX by a PT or a personal computer System Password PT ...

Page 951: ...ge 4 10 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 2 PT Programming Manager Password PT Programming Prog 1 Specifies the manager password to authorise the PT user to access manager programming Value Range 4 10 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual Refe...

Page 952: ...ifies the system password used to access Maintenance Console at Administrator Level This password can only be set in Interactive mode Value Range 4 10 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 1 PC Programming System Password PC Programming Installer Level Specifies the system password used to access Maintenance Console a...

Page 953: ...Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 1 PC Programming PC Programming Manual 953 13 1 11 1 Main ...

Page 954: ...ference only Value Range 000 999 Maintenance Console Location 13 2 11 2 PT Programming Access Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 2 PT Programming PROG Selects whether User Level PT users can access each system programming item Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 13 2 11 2 PT Programming Access Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Referen...

Page 955: ... KX TDE600 select the shelf for which to set connections from the Shelf list Note that PFT connections can only be made within the same shelf Trunk Card Slot No Specifies the position of the trunk card to be used Value Range None 1 11 Maintenance Console Location 13 3 11 3 Power Failure Transfer Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 1 Power Failure Transfer Extension Card...

Page 956: ...sole Location 13 4 11 4 1 SNMP System Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP System Monitor Port Number Receive Specifies the port number used to receive SNMP data requests from an SNMP manager Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 13 4 11 4 1 SNMP System Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide R...

Page 957: ... Location 13 4 11 4 1 SNMP System Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP System Monitor MIB SysLocation Specifies a physical location for the system Value Range Max 255 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 4 11 4 1 SNMP System Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Man...

Page 958: ... Location 13 5 11 4 2 SNMP Manager Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP System Monitor Community Name Specifies a community name of an SNMP manager Value Range Max 255 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 5 11 4 2 SNMP Manager Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Management Protoc...

Page 959: ...tion 13 5 11 4 2 SNMP Manager Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP System Monitor TRAP Authentication Failure Selects whether the PBX sends Authentication Failure TRAP to an SNMP manager or not Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 13 5 11 4 2 SNMP Manager Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Referen...

Page 960: ...ide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP System Monitor TRAP Alarm Minor Selects whether the PBX sends Minor Alarm TRAP to an SNMP manager or not Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 13 5 11 4 2 SNMP Manager Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP System Monitor 960 PC Programming Manual 13 5 1...

Page 961: ...sation Programming Manual References 5 29 3 11 Air Synchronisation Group Feature Guide References None Shelf Indicates the shelf type and or position reference only Value Range For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 Physical Virtual For KX TDE600 Shelf number Virtual Maintenance Console Location 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References 5 29 3 11 Air Synchronisation Group Feature Guide Referenc...

Page 962: ...ange Port number Maintenance Console Location 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References 5 29 3 11 Air Synchronisation Group Feature Guide References None CS Name Indicates the name of the CS reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References 5 29 3 11 Air Synchronisation Group 962 PC Programming Ma...

Page 963: ... 29 3 11 Air Synchronisation Group Feature Guide References None Status Indicates whether a certain CS is registered reference only Value Range Registered Maintenance Console Location 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References 5 29 3 11 Air Synchronisation Group Feature Guide References None CS Class Specifies the classification of each CS within the Air Synchronisation Group This...

Page 964: ...e Location 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References 5 29 3 11 Air Synchronisation Group Feature Guide References None Primary CS Slot Indicates the slot position of the primary CS reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References 5 29 3 11 Air Synchronisation Group Feature Guide References None 964 PC ...

Page 965: ...the name of the primary CS reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References 5 29 3 11 Air Synchronisation Group Feature Guide References None Secondary CS Index Specifies the number of the secondary CS Value Range 1 16 Maintenance Console Location 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References 5 29 3 ...

Page 966: ...s None Secondary CS Port Indicates the port number of the secondary CS reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References 5 29 3 11 Air Synchronisation Group Feature Guide References None Secondary CS CS Name Indicates the name of the secondary CS reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 1...

Page 967: ...Programming Manual References 5 29 3 11 Air Synchronisation Group Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 967 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation ...

Page 968: ...968 PC Programming Manual 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation ...

Page 969: ...Section 14 Appendix PC Programming Manual 969 ...

Page 970: ... 3 1 1 1 Slot 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Message 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM 10 6 8 5 Carrier Authorisation Cod...

Page 971: ...amme launcher Connect LAN 3 3 1 1 Slot Activation Key 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension 3 57 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port 3 61 1 2 Portable Station 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings PC Programming Manual 971 14 1 2 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2 01xx ...

Page 972: ... 2 Operator BGM BGM and Music on Hold Music Source of BGM3 8 OGM No BGM and Music on Hold Music Source of BGM3 8 Card 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Air Synchronisation Watching Degeneracy 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 5 Conference Group Call Broadcast Mode 5 29 3 11 Air Synchronisation Group 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Changed Contents 1 2 1 Installing and Starting the Mai...

Page 973: ...irtual IP Extension 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 4 Send CLIP of CO Caller when call is transferred to CO CLIP of held party Send CLIP of CO Caller when call is forwarded to CO 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND 6 13 4 2 3 Portabl...

Page 974: ...ic on Hold Music Source of BGM3 8 OGM No BGM and Music on Hold Music Source of BGM3 8 Card 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Air Synchronisation Watching Degeneracy 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 5 Conference Group Call Broadcast Mode 5 29 3 11 Air Synchronisation Group 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Changed Contents 1 2 1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console Starting the Maintenance Console and A...

Page 975: ... IP Extension Port 3 61 1 2 Portable Station 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 4 Send CLIP of CO Caller when call is transferred to CO CLIP of held party Send CLIP of CO Caller when call is forwarded to CO 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station F...

Page 976: ...976 PC Programming Manual 14 1 4 KX TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 3 0xxx ...

Page 977: ...Feature Programming References PC Programming Manual 977 ...

Page 978: ... CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E E911 3PTY Feature Guide References 1 21 1 3 Advice of Charge AOC Automatic Callback Busy Camp on 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Automatic Callback Busy Cancel 4 11 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature Automatic Callback Busy Feature Guide References 1 8 1 Automatic Callback Busy Camp on Automatic Extension Release 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Di...

Page 979: ...7 2 5 2 External Pager Feature Guide References 1 17 4 Background Music BGM Budget Management 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit 8 3 6 3 Verification Code Budget Management 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Charge Charge Options Action at Charge Limit Feature Guide References 1 9 2 Budget Management Built in Si...

Page 980: ...Room Call Charge Services 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Pay Tone Pay Tone Frequency Pay Tone Sending Flash while end talk 5 6 3 1 5 Trunk Group Charge Rate 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Type 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Charge Margin Tax Margin Rate for Telephone Margin Tax Tax Rate for Telephone Charge Options D...

Page 981: ...rding FWD 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features FWD No Answer Timer Set 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings CO SMDR Call Forward to CO Programming Manager Group Forward Set Optional Device Other Extensions Remote Operation by Other Extension 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Main CO CO Duration Time 60s Extension CO Duration Time 60s 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Setting...

Page 982: ... Counters Recall Call Park Recall Recall Disconnect after Recall 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Call Park Call Park Retrieve 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Call Park Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Call Park 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Call Park Optional Parameter or Ringing Tone Type Numbe...

Page 983: ...sfer Call Transfer CT by ISDN 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E E911 3PTY Feature Guide References 1 21 1 7 Call Transfer CT by ISDN Call Transfer CT by QSIG 3 33 1 1 Slot Por...

Page 984: ...Automatic C Waiting Option 4 Call Waiting Tone Type 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 2 Manual C Waiting for Extension Call Option 2 Automatic C Waiting Option 4 Call Waiting Tone Type Feature Guide References 1 8 4 2 Call Waiting Tone Caller ID 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Miscellaneous Caller ID Waiting to receive Caller ID Visual Caller ID Display 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 4...

Page 985: ...roperty BRI Port ISDN CO Subscriber Number Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port CO Setting Subscriber Number Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E E911 3PTY 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Subscriber Number 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Subscr...

Page 986: ...Name Feature Guide References 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Centralised Voice Mail 3 62 1 3 Option New Card Installation ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Centralised VM 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature Data R...

Page 987: ...tion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS by QSIG Computer Telephony Integration CTI 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Dial Information CTI 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 6 CTI Feature Guide References 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Conference 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf Unattended Conference Recall Start Timer Unattended Conferen...

Page 988: ...onfirmation Tone Tone 4 2 Finish Conference Confirmation Tone Tone 5 Hold Feature Guide References 1 29 2 Confirmation Tone DHCP 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR DHCP Client Feature Guide References 2 4 5 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Assignment Dial Tone 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 3 Dial Tone Distinctive Dial Tone Dial Tone Dial Tone for Extension Dial Tone Dial Tone for ARS Featu...

Page 989: ...ion Day Lunch Break Night Tenant Number VM Trunk Group No Feature Guide References 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 3 49 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Miscellaneous Incoming Call Inter digit Timer DDI DID 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings DDI DID TIE MSN Distribution Method DDI DID TIE MSN Remove Digit DDI DID TIE MSN Additional...

Page 990: ... Lunch Break Night 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Display Information 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 5 PT Feature Access No 1 8 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 5 Display Language Incoming Call Display Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Exte...

Page 991: ...s Call from Doorphone 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 3 Confirmation Tone Tone 1 Called by Voice 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call E1 Line Service 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port 3 45 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Connection Command Feature Guide References 1 22 1 E1 Line Service Emergency Call 9 4 7 4 Emergency Dial Feature Guide References 1 5 4 2 Emergency Cal...

Page 992: ...CD Password PIN Display 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main Extension PIN 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main Extension PIN Feature Guide References 1 28 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN Extension Port Configuration 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Pair Extension Feature Guide References 2 1 1 Extension Port Configuration E...

Page 993: ... Sensor Flash Recall Terminate 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Disconnect Time 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Disconnect Time 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Disconnect Time 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port Disconnect Time 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Disconnect Time 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 7 Flash Mode during CO Conversation 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Ext...

Page 994: ...3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Floating Extension Number 13 1 11 1 Main Remote Remote Analogue Remote Modem Floating Extension Number Remote ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number Feature Guide References 2 3 7 Floating Extension FWD DND Button Group FWD Button 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features FWD DND Set Cancel Call from CO Extension FWD DND Set Cancel Call from CO FWD DND Set Cancel Call fr...

Page 995: ...Maximum No of Busy Extension 5 16 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Options Wrap up Timer based on Options Longest Idle Distribution Optional SD Card Required 5 14 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Member List Delayed Ring 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 8 Wrap up Timer 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 8 Wrap up Timer ...

Page 996: ...s Host PBX Access Code 13 1 11 1 Main SMDR Options Option ARS Dial Feature Guide References 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX Hot Line 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Hot Line Pickup Dial Start 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Hot Line Pickup Dial Program Set Cancel 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 2 Pickup...

Page 997: ...rd Property BRI type PRI type 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port 3 34 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Connection Command 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port 3 36 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Connection Command 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Extension Inter digit 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 2 ISDN en Bloc Dial as End of Dial for en Bloc mode 5 5 3 1 4 Dialling Plan Auto...

Page 998: ...tension Settings Main Extension Number Main Extension Name Option 3 Intercom Call by Voice 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main Extension Number Extension Name Feature Guide References 1 5 3 Intercom Call Internal Call Block 4 14 2 7 3 Class of Service Internal Call Block COS Number of the Extension Which Receive the Call from Other Extension 1 64 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distributi...

Page 999: ...ypad Protocol KX T7710 One touch Dialling 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main KX T7710 Feature Guide References 1 6 1 3 KX T7710 One touch Dialling Last Number Redial 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Automatic Redial Repeat Counter Automatic Redial Repeat Interval Automatic Redial Redial Call Ring Duration Automatic Redial Analogue CO Mute Busy Detection Timer 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main ...

Page 1000: ... 6 7 Utility Message File Transfer PBX to PC 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Type 13 1 11 1 Main SMDR Print Information Error Log Maintenance Local Alarm Display Extension 1 Extension 2 Maintenance Daily Test Start Time Set Maintenance Daily Test Start Time Hour Maintenance Daily Test Start Time Minute Feature Gui...

Page 1001: ...Manager Manager 13 1 11 1 Main Password Manager Password PT Programming Prog 1 Feature Guide References 2 2 6 Manager Features Message Waiting 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type SLT Power Supply 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Message Waiting Set Cancel Call Back 4 11 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature Message Waiting Set 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 3 Dial Tone Distinctiv...

Page 1002: ...S Settings Programming Manager Manager 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Dial for NDSS 6 8 4 1 6 Wired Extension NDSS Link Data Send 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Dial for NDSS 6 15 4 2 4 Portable Station NDSS Link Data Send 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Type Dial for NDSS 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission 11 3 9 3 Network Operator VoIP 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table Feature Guide...

Page 1003: ... 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM PBX Operator Day Lunch Break Night 8 6 6 6 Tenant Operator Extension Number Feature Guide References 2 2 5 Operator Features Outgoing Message OGM 2 6 6 Utility Message File Transfer PC to PBX 2 6 7 Utility Message File Transfer PBX to PC 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf DISA Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Mai...

Page 1004: ...Paging MOH Paging EPG 1 External Pager 1 Paging EPG 2 External Pager 2 Paging Paging Level from PT Speaker 5 10 3 4 Paging Group 5 11 3 4 Paging Group All Setting 5 12 3 4 Paging Group External Pager 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 6 Paging Deny Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging Parallelled Telephone 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type APT SLT Parallel Ring 3 24 1 1...

Page 1005: ... 1 Class of Service COS Settings PDN SDN 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 4 System Wireless SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for SDN Extension Number for SDN Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Loop CO Single CO Group CO ICD Group SDN 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for SDN Extension Numbe...

Page 1006: ...n Flexible Button Type 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Type Feature Guide References 1 14 1 3 Privacy Release PS Directory 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main Extension Name 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main Extension Name 8 1 6 1 System Speed Dial Name CO Line Access Number Telephone Number Feature Guide References 1 25 3 PS Directory PS Ring Group 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Di...

Page 1007: ...Queuing Busy Overflow No Answer Queuing Time Table Miscellaneous Extension No Answer Redirection Time Miscellaneous Maximum No of Busy Extension 5 19 3 7 1 VM DPT Group System Settings Call Waiting on VM Group 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Others Call Waiting on VM Group 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Extension Number for Hurry up 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible But...

Page 1008: ...ng for Guest Feature Guide References 1 27 2 Room Status Control Self Labelling KX NT366 only 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Label Name Feature Guide References 1 31 4 Self Labelling KX NT366 only SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension 3 17 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual SIP Extension 3 18 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual SIP Extension Port 3 19 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual SIP Exten...

Page 1009: ...g CO Call Printout SMDR 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Main SMDR for External Hotel Application 2 Printing Message 1 8 Charge Charge Options Currency 13 1 11 1 Main SMDR SMDR Options RS 232C Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Supervisory Feature 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Incoming Call Queue Monitor 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings M...

Page 1010: ...ty Conference 3PTY by ISDN TIE Line Service 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Network Numbering Plan Trunk Property 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Network Numbering Plan Trunk Property 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Trunk Property 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Trunk Property 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port Trunk Property 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Miscellaneous Incoming Call I...

Page 1011: ...meter Ringing Tone Type Number for Time Service Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Timed Reminder 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf Timed Reminder Repeat Counter Timed Reminder Interval Time Timed Reminder Alarm Ringing Duration 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Remote Timed Reminder Remote Wakeup Call Timed Reminder Set Cancel 4 17 2 8 3 Ring Tone Patterns Call from ...

Page 1012: ...roperty T1 Port Connection 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Connection 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port Connection 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Connection 3 53 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port Connection 3 57 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port Connection 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Idle Line Access Local Access Trunk Group Access Single CO Line Access 4 13 2 7 2 Cla...

Page 1013: ... 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings CO SMDR Extension CO Line Call Duration Limit 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 2 Extension CO Call Limitation For Incoming Call 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Main CO CO Duration Time 60s Extension CO Duration Time 60s 9 5 7 5 Miscellaneous Dial Digits Limitation After Answering Dial Digits Feature Guide References 1 11 8 Trunk Call Limitation Verification Code...

Page 1014: ...t DPT Type VM Unit No 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port DPT Type VM Port No 5 19 3 7 1 VM DPT Group System Settings 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings 5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Recall Transfer Recall ...

Page 1015: ...ion 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Miscellaneous Voice Mail Caller from VM to CO On hook Wait Time 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Miscellaneous Programmed Mailbox No 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings 5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Programmed Mailbox No 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Extension...

Page 1016: ...king Extension Features Whisper OHCA 4 11 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override 2 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Extension Feature OHCA Whisper OHCA 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 5 Whisper OHCA for SLT APT KX T72xx Feature Guide References 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Propert...

Page 1017: ...PC Programming Manual 1017 Notes ...

Page 1018: ...ial is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co Ltd and may be reproduced for internal use only All other reproduction in whole or in part is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic Communications Co Ltd Panasonic Communications Co Ltd 2007 PSQX4189TA KK0607KE6069 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for KX-TDE100

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands